Nec 2400 Ipx Users Manual NEAX2400 Circuit Card

PDF NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 T E X T F I L E S

IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w) IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w)

NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 NEC_IPX_Circuit_Card_Manual_Issue_1 www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

2400 IPX to the manual 0664b456-d22f-4a22-a36c-0ef294a737d6

2015-01-24

: Nec Nec-2400-Ipx-Users-Manual-331892 nec-2400-ipx-users-manual-331892 nec pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 644

DownloadNec Nec-2400-Ipx-Users-Manual- NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual Nec-2400-ipx-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
NDA-24296
ISSUE 1
STOCK # 200774

®

Circuit Card Manual

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,
Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC
America, Inc.
NEAX® and D term® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

i

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

27

1

ii

1

28

1

iii

1

29

1

iv

1

30

1

v

1

31

1

vi

1

32

1

vii

1

33

1

viii

1

34

1

ix

1

35

1

x

1

36

1

xi

1

37

1

xii

1

38

1

1

1

39

1

2

1

40

1

3

1

41

1

4

1

42

1

5

1

43

1

6

1

44

1

7

1

45

1

8

1

46

1

9

1

47

1

10

1

48

1

11

1

49

1

12

1

50

1

13

1

51

1

14

1

52

1

15

1

53

1

16

1

54

1

17

1

55

1

18

1

56

1

19

1

57

1

20

1

58

1

21

1

59

1

22

1

60

1

23

1

61

1

24

1

62

1

25

1

63

1

26

64

1
ISSUE 1

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

DATE

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

1
ISSUE 3

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 1/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

65

1

103

1

66

1

104

1

67

1

105

1

68

1

106

1

69

1

107

1

70

1

108

1

71

1

109

1

72

1

110

1

73

1

111

1

74

1

112

1

75

1

113

1

76

1

114

1

77

1

115

1

78

1

116

1

79

1

117

1

80

1

118

1

81

1

119

1

82

1

120

1

83

1

121

1

84

1

122

1

85

1

123

1

86

1

124

1

87

1

125

1

88

1

126

1

89

1

127

1

90

1

128

1

91

1

129

1

92

1

130

1

93

1

131

1

94

1

132

1

95

1

133

1

96

1

134

1

97

1

135

1

98

1

136

1

99

1

137

1

100

1

138

1

101

1

139

1

102

1

140

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 2/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

141

1

179

1

142

1

180

1

143

1

181

1

144

1

182

1

145

1

183

1

146

1

184

1

147

1

185

1

148

1

186

1

149

1

187

1

150

1

188

1

151

1

189

1

152

1

190

1

153

1

191

1

154

1

192

1

155

1

193

1

156

1

194

1

157

1

195

1

158

1

196

1

159

1

197

1

160

1

198

1

161

1

199

1

162

1

200

1

163

1

201

1

164

1

202

1

165

1

203

1

166

1

204

1

167

1

205

1

168

1

206

1

169

1

207

1

170

1

208

1

171

1

209

1

172

1

210

1

173

1

211

1

174

1

212

1

175

1

213

1

176

1

214

1

177

1

215

1

178

1

216

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 3/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

217

1

255

1

218

1

256

1

219

1

257

1

220

1

258

1

221

1

259

1

222

1

260

1

223

1

261

1

224

1

262

1

225

1

263

1

226

1

264

1

227

1

265

1

228

1

266

1

229

1

267

1

230

1

268

1

231

1

269

1

232

1

270

1

233

1

271

1

234

1

272

1

235

1

273

1

236

1

274

1

237

1

275

1

238

1

276

1

239

1

277

1

240

1

278

1

241

1

279

1

242

1

280

1

243

1

281

1

244

1

282

1

245

1

283

1

246

1

284

1

247

1

285

1

248

1

286

1

249

1

287

1

250

1

288

1

251

1

289

1

252

1

290

1

253

1

291

1

254

1

292

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 4/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

293

1

331

1

294

1

332

1

295

1

333

1

296

1

334

1

297

1

335

1

298

1

336

1

299

1

337

1

300

1

338

1

301

1

339

1

302

1

340

1

303

1

341

1

304

1

342

1

305

1

343

1

306

1

344

1

307

1

345

1

308

1

346

1

309

1

347

1

310

1

348

1

311

1

349

1

312

1

350

1

313

1

351

1

314

1

352

1

315

1

353

1

316

1

354

1

317

1

355

1

318

1

356

1

319

1

357

1

320

1

358

1

321

1

359

1

322

1

360

1

323

1

361

1

324

1

362

1

325

1

363

1

326

1

364

1

327

1

365

1

328

1

366

1

329

1

367

1

330

1

368

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 5/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

369

1

407

1

370

1

408

1

371

1

409

1

372

1

410

1

373

1

411

1

374

1

412

1

375

1

413

1

376

1

414

1

377

1

415

1

378

1

416

1

379

1

417

1

380

1

418

1

381

1

419

1

382

1

420

1

383

1

421

1

384

1

422

1

385

1

423

1

386

1

424

1

387

1

425

1

388

1

426

1

389

1

427

1

390

1

428

1

391

1

429

1

392

1

430

1

393

1

431

1

394

1

432

1

395

1

433

1

396

1

434

1

397

1

435

1

398

1

436

1

399

1

437

1

400

1

438

1

401

1

439

1

402

1

440

1

403

1

441

1

404

1

442

1

405

1

443

1

406

1

444

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 6/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

445

1

483

1

446

1

484

1

447

1

485

1

448

1

486

1

449

1

487

1

450

1

488

1

451

1

489

1

452

1

490

1

453

1

491

1

454

1

492

1

455

1

493

1

456

1

494

1

457

1

495

1

458

1

496

1

459

1

497

1

460

1

498

1

461

1

499

1

462

1

500

1

463

1

501

1

464

1

502

1

465

1

503

1

466

1

504

1

467

1

505

1

468

1

506

1

469

1

507

1

470

1

508

1

471

1

509

1

472

1

510

1

473

1

511

1

474

1

512

1

475

1

513

1

476

1

514

1

477

1

515

1

478

1

516

1

479

1

517

1

480

1

518

1

481

1

519

1

482

1

520

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 7/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

521

1

559

1

522

1

560

1

523

1

561

1

524

1

562

1

525

1

563

1

526

1

564

1

527

1

565

1

528

1

566

1

529

1

567

1

530

1

568

1

531

1

569

1

532

1

570

1

533

1

571

1

534

1

572

1

535

1

573

1

536

1

574

1

537

1

575

1

538

1

576

1

539

1

577

1

540

1

578

1

541

1

579

1

542

1

580

1

543

1

581

1

544

1

582

1

545

1

583

1

546

1

584

1

547

1

585

1

548

1

586

1

549

1

587

1

550

1

588

1

551

1

589

1

552

1

590

1

553

1

591

1

554

1

592

1

555

1

593

1

556

1

594

1

557

1

595

1

558

1

596

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 8/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

597

1

598

1

599

1

600

1

601

1

602

1

603

1

604

1

605

1

606

1

607

1

608

1

609

1

610

1

611

1

612

1

613

1

614

1

615

1

616

1

617

1

618

1

2

3

4

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

5

2

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

ISSUE No.
1

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 9/9

NDA-24296

NDA-24296
ISSUE 1
OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX
Circuit Card Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SN1695 CPRBF-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
PH-DK10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
PH-PC45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PZ-ME44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

NDA-24296

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
PA-8COTBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
PA-16COTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
PA-CS02-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
PA-CS08-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
PA-8LCBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
PA-16LCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
PA-16LCBJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
PA-16LCBJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
PA-M69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
PA-M103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
PA-8RSTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
PA-2CCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
PA-24CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
PA-2DCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
PA-ILCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
PA-4ILCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
PA-8ILCE-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
PA-4DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
PA-4DATB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
PA-4AMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
PA-8TLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
PA-M87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
PA-24PRTB-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-4
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-26
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33

Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CPR Location for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Face Layout ofPA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Face Layout ofPA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Face Layout ofPA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Face Layout ofPA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Face Layout ofPA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES
Page iii
Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
Figure 2-36
Figure 2-36
Figure 2-37
Figure 2-38
Figure 2-39
Figure 2-40
Figure 2-41
Figure 2-42
Figure 2-43
Figure 2-44
Figure 2-45
Figure 2-46
Figure 2-47
Figure 2-48
Figure 2-49
Figure 2-50
Figure 2-51
Figure 2-52
Figure 2-53
Figure 2-54
Figure 2-55
Figure 2-56
Figure 2-57
Figure 2-58
Figure 2-59
Figure 2-60
Figure 2-61
Figure 2-62
Figure 2-63
Figure 2-63
Figure 2-64
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-66
Figure 2-67
Figure 2-68
Figure 2-69
Figure 2-70
Figure 2-71
Figure 2-72
Figure 2-73
Figure 2-74
Figure 2-75
Figure 2-76
Figure 2-77
Figure 2-78

Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
-48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
External Interface for PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
External Interface for PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
External Interface for PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
External Interface for PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

LIST OF FIGURES
Page iv
Revision 1.0

Page

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 2-79
Figure 2-80
Figure 2-81
Figure 2-82
Figure 2-83
Figure 2-84
Figure 2-85
Figure 2-86
Figure 2-87
Figure 2-88
Figure 2-89
Figure 2-90
Figure 2-91
Figure 2-92
Figure 2-93
Figure 2-94
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15

Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Interface for PZ-M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Interface for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connections for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location for PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an
External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . .
Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29

Page

NDA-24296

156
157
157
158
159
160
160
162
163
164
164
166
167
168
168
170
172
174
178
179
181
183
184
189
190
192
193
195
201
202
203
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
211
212
217
218
220
221
223
230
231
232

LIST OF FIGURES
Page v
Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 3-29
Figure 3-30

PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an
External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . .
Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8COTBJ (8COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16 COTBE (16COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CS02-C (2ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CS08 (HMATI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CS08-B (HMATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8LCBR (8LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16LCBE (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-31
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-36
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
Figure 3-44
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
Figure 3-47
Figure 3-48
Figure 3-49
Figure 3-50
Figure 3-51
Figure 3-52
Figure 3-53
Figure 3-54
Figure 3-55
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-57
Figure 3-58
Figure 3-59
Figure 3-60
Figure 3-61
Figure 3-62
Figure 3-63
Figure 3-64
Figure 3-65
Figure 3-66
Figure 3-67
Figure 3-68
Figure 3-68
Figure 3-69
Figure 3-70
Figure 3-71
Figure 3-72
Figure 3-72

LIST OF FIGURES
Page vi
Revision 1.0

Page

NDA-24296

232
233
234
235
236
237
239
240
242
244
245
247
248
250
252
258
259
260
260
262
263
266
268
269
273
275
277
281
283
284
288
289
290
291
293
295
297
300
301
303
305
311
312
313
315
317
321
322

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 3-73
Figure 3-74
Figure 3-75
Figure 3-76
Figure 3-76
Figure 3-77
Figure 3-78
Figure 3-79
Figure 3-80
Figure 3-80
Figure 3-81
Figure 3-82
Figure 3-83
Figure 3-84
Figure 3-84
Figure 3-85
Figure 3-86
Figure 3-87
Figure 3-88
Figure 3-88
Figure 3-89
Figure 3-90
Figure 3-91
Figure 3-91
Figure 3-92
Figure 3-93
Figure 3-94
Figure 3-95
Figure 3-96
Figure 3-97
Figure 3-98
Figure 3-99
Figure 3-99
Figure 3-100
Figure 3-101
Figure 3-102
Figure 3-103
Figure 3-104
Figure 3-105
Figure 3-106
Figure 3-107
Figure 3-108
Figure 3-109
Figure 3-110
Figure 3-111
Figure 3-112
Figure 3-113
Figure 3-114
Figure 3-115

Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-24LCBV (LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Running for LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCU Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296

323
325
327
330
331
332
334
335
340
341
342
344
345
350
351
352
354
355
358
359
361
362
366
367
368
370
371
378
379
381
382
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
394
396
397
398
399
400
403
405
406
408
409

LIST OF FIGURES
Page vii
Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 3-116
Figure 3-117
Figure 3-118
Figure 3-119
Figure 3-120
Figure 3-121
Figure 3-122
Figure 3-123
Figure 3-124
Figure 3-125
Figure 3-126
Figure 3-127
Figure 3-128
Figure 3-129
Figure 3-130
Figure 3-131
Figure 3-132
Figure 3-133
Figure 3-134
Figure 3-134
Figure 3-135
Figure 3-136
Figure 3-137
Figure 3-138
Figure 3-139
Figure 3-140
Figure 3-141
Figure 3-142
Figure 3-143
Figure 3-144
Figure 3-144
Figure 3-145
Figure 3-145
Figure 3-146
Figure 3-147
Figure 3-148
Figure 3-149
Figure 3-150
Figure 3-151
Figure 3-152
Figure 3-153
Figure 3-154
Figure 3-155
Figure 3-156
Figure 3-156
Figure 3-157
Figure 3-158
Figure 3-159
Figure 3-160

Face Layout ofPA-8RSTK (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8RSTM (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8RSTY (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection betweenPA-SDTA andPA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-2CCHA (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-24CCTA (24CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-2DCHA (2DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-ILCG (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-4ILCH (4ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8ILCE-A (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-4DATA (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF FIGURES
Page viii
Revision 1.0

Page

NDA-24296

411
417
418
424
425
433
435
436
439
440
443
444
445
446
448
450
453
455
459
460
461
462
464
466
468
475
476
479
481
485
486
487
488
490
492
496
497
499
501
506
507
509
511
517
518
519
521
523
527

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 3-161
Figure 3-162
Figure 3-163
Figure 3-164
Figure 3-165
Figure 3-166
Figure 3-167
Figure 3-168
Figure 3-169
Figure 3-170
Figure 3-171
Figure 3-172
Figure 3-172
Figure 3-173
Figure 3-174
Figure 3-175
Figure 3-176
Figure 3-177
Figure 3-178
Figure 3-179
Figure 3-180
Figure 3-180
Figure 3-180
Figure 3-180
Figure 3-181
Figure 3-182
Figure 3-183
Figure 3-184
Figure 3-185
Figure 3-186
Figure 3-187
Figure 3-188
Figure 3-189
Figure 3-190
Figure 3-191
Figure 3-192
Figure 3-193
Figure 3-194

Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-4AMPC (4AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-8TLTR (TLT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REC/PGA Connector Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296

531
533
537
541
543
545
546
548
550
554
556
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
573
576
577
578
579
580
582
583
589
590
592
594
596
602
603
605
607
609
615
616

LIST OF FIGURES
Page ix
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF FIGURES
Page x
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF TABLES
Table

Title

Page

Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
Table 3-9
Table 3-10
Table 3-11
Table 3-12
Table 3-13
Table 3-14
Table 3-15

Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATI Card Lamp Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital PAD Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296 (E)

248
264
354
357
361
441
442
445
467
474
493
528
536
538
584

CHAPTER 3
Page xi
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3
Page xii
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296 (E)

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL
This manual provides circuit card descriptions for the NEAX2400 IPX system.
This manual is for those persons involved in system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IPX.
For each circuit card the following items are explained:
•

General function

•

Slot to mount the circuit card

•

Precautions for mounting the card

•

Location of the electronic devices on the card surface

•

Description of the LED

•

Description of the switches

•

Physical interface

The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the
Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card.
•

Control Circuit Card
White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the
Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs.

•

Line/Trunk Circuit Card
Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.

Note:

This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IPX.
When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card
Manual with the following changes:
• The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IPX;
however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI).
• The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IPX) is
the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS.
• The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manual’s section on
PH-PC36 (MUX).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Revision 1.0

2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD
The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 11. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown inFigure
1-2. The control circuit cards for the IPX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in
Figure 1-3 and 1-4.
As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in
Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM).
The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM.
Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.

CHAPTER 1
Page 2
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-SW10(TSW)

PH-SW10(TSW)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PIM0

BSCM
00 01 02 03 04
PH-PC40(EMA)

PH-IO24(IOC)

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)
LPM

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 3
Revision 1.0

NEAX2400IMS (IPX)
4-IMG System
B
S
C
M

IMG0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LPM

TSWM

Dummy/APM

Dummy/APM

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

BSCM

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04
PH-IO24(IOC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)
LPM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)

CHAPTER 1
Page 4
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400IMS (IPX)
4-IMG System
B
S
C
M

IMG1

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LPM

TSWM

Dummy/APM

Dummy/APM

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-CK16/17(PLO1)

PH-CK16/17(PLO0)

PH-SW12(TDSW13)

PH-SW12(TDSW12)

PH-SW12(TDSW11)

PH-SW12(TDSW10)

PH-SW12(TDSW03)

PH-SW12(TDSW02)

PH-SW12(TDSW01)

PH-SW12(TDSW00)

PH-GT09(GT1)

PH-GT09(GT0)

PH-PC20(DLKC1)

PH-PC20(DLKC0)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

TSWM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 5
Revision 1.0

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)
NEAX2400
IMS (IPX)
4IMG-SYSTEM
B
S
C
M

IMG2

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LPM

TSWM

Dummy/APM

Dummy/APM

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4)

CHAPTER 1
Page 6
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)
NEAX2400
IMS (IPX)
4IMG-SYSTEM
B
S
C
M

IMG3

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LPM

TSWM

Dummy/APM

Dummy/APM

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 7
Revision 1.0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

CMG

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0~3)

Note:

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5)

CHAPTER 1
Page 8
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG0/4/8/12

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04

BSCM

PH-PC43(EMA)

PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 9
Revision 1.0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG1/5/9/13

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

TSWM0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5)
CHAPTER 1
Page 10
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG2/6/10/14

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK18 (CLK1)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

TSWM1

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 11
Revision 1.0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM0

Dummy

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5)

CHAPTER 1
Page 12
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM
PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM
DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM
ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM
SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy
CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

CMG

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)
PZ-M565
(ISAGTA)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PZ-M565
(ISAGTA)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)
PZ-ME44
(MEM)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)
HSW10 (PU-SW01)
TSW13 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW12 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW11 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW10 (PU-SW00-A)
PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)
IOGT1 (PH-GT10)
IOGT0 (PH-GT10)
PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)
TSW03 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW02 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW01 (PU-SW00-A)
TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)
HSW01 (PU-SW01)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-PC19
(LANI)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-PC19
(LANI)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PH-PC43 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

CHAPTER 1
Page 13
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-ME44
(MEM)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PH-PC43 (EMA)

HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)
PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

Note:

PH-DK10 (DSPC)

SP

PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)

ISWM

PH-M22 (MMC)

CMP

PIM
CMP
NEAX2400 IPX

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04

FANU

DUMMY

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5)

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG0/4/8/12

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04

BSCM

PH-PC43(EMA)

PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5)

CHAPTER 1
Page 14
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG1/5/9/13

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

TSWM0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 15
Revision 1.0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG2/6/10/14

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK18 (CLK1)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

TSWM1

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5)
CHAPTER 1
Page 16
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

CMP

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

ISWM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM

IMG3/7/11/15

SP

LP

TSWM0

TSWM1

Dummy

CMG

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

IMG2/6/10/14

IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PIM0

Dummy

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1
Page 17
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 1
Page 18
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2

CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card.
•

General Function
Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card.

•

Mounting Location/Condition
Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there
are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

•

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face
layout.

•

Lamp Indications
The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

•

Switch Settings
Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc.

•

External Interface
If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting
slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead
locations and the connecting routes are shown.

In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of
the explanation for each circuit card.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 19
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board
1.

General Function
The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system consists of the following components.
(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random
Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZGT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on
the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).
(b) DSP:

Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

(c) FDD/HDD:

Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit
card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in
operation.

(d) PWR:

Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.
To I/O local bus

HDD
FDD

HDD
DSP

DSP

To HUB

LANI

CPU

To HUB

LANI

CPR#0

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To HUB

CPR#1

LANI

To HUB

To MISC bus
Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR)

CHAPTER 2
Page 20
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

FDD

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

The CPR in IPX-UMG system consists of the following components.
(a) CPU BOARD: Contains System Processor Unit (SP)/Common Main Processor Unit (CMP)/Local
Processor Unit (LP), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory
(RAM). This board may also contain PCI MEM (PZ-ME44), the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/
PZ-GT20/PZ-M565) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI
(PZ-PC19/PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).

Note:

(b) DSP:

Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

(c) FDD/HDD:

Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit
card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in
operation. Note

(d) PWR:

Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the SP/CMP/
LP.

FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 21
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local
Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-2. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard
Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are
located in those busses respectively.

ISWM/PIM0
BSCM

LPM

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note
CPR

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PC19
(LANI)
PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)
Note:

This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.
Figure 2-2 CPR Location

CHAPTER 2
Page 22
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

When the SN1695 CPRBF-A is used in the IPX-UMG system, the CPR is mounted on each processor module (SP, CMP, and LPs) as shown in Figure 2-3. As to the mounting location of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP, and
other circuit cards within the CPR, refer to Figure 2-5.

LMG0 ‘ 3
CMG
00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

LANI LANI ISAGT
00
0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
0001020304

00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

CMP–CPR

00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23

LANI LANI ISAGT

SP–CPR

LANI LANI ISAGT

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

LANI LANI ISAGT

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

LP–CPR

Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 23
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

ISWM
/Dummy
/PIM0

SP/CMP
/LP

CPR

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)
/PZ-M565 (ISAGT)
Note 1
PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI)
Note 2

PZ-ME44
(PCI MEM)
Note 4

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)
Note 3
Note 1: PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system or in IMG0/4/8/12 of IPX-UMG

system.
Note 2: The required LANI card and its mounting slot differs depending on each processor unit on which the

CPR is mounted within the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the explanation for PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23 card
in this manual or Installation Manual.
Note 3: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG System.
Note 4: PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) and PZ-M565 (ISAGT) cards are mounted on the CMP only.
Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2
Page 24
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors.
Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial
Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

[CPR for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]
PWR(PZ-PW92)
FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28)

DSP(PZ-DK224)
Note

PZ-PW92
DC-40V~-58.6V

A

B

HDD

SW
I

ON
MBR

O
-48V OUT

ON

OFF

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0

5A
125V
AC/DC

IMG3

STATUS

4

SYSTEM SELECT1
PALM

SENSE

ON
1

12

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON
13

INPWR

IMG2

IMG0

ON
1

OUTPWR

CPU OPE WDT

CPURST

20

ON
ALM
SLOT NO.

Note:

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.
Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 25
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

[CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System]
PWR(PZ-PW92)
FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28)

DSP(PZ-DK224)
LANI(PZ-PC23)
LANI(PZ-PC19)

PZ-PW92
DC-40V~-58.6V

A

B

HDD

SW
I

ON
MBR

O
-48V OUT

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0

5A
125V
AC/DC

IMG0
IMG3

STATUS

4

SYSTEM SELECT1
SENSE

ON

PALM

1

12

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON
13

INPWR

IMG2

ON
1

OUTPWR

CPU OPE WDT

ON

OFF

CPURST

20

ON
ALM
SLOT NO.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

ISAGT
(PZ-GT13)

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System

[CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System]
PWR(PZ-PW92)
DSP(PZ-DK224)
ISAGTA
(PZ-M565)

LANI(PZ-PC22)
PZ-PW92

I

DC-40V~-58.6V
SW
ON

A

MBR
O
-48V OUT

ON

OFF

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0

5A
125V
AC/DC

IMG0
IMG3

STATUS

4

SYSTEM SELECT1
PALM

SENSE

ON
1

12

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON
13

INPWR

IMG2

B

ON
1

OUTPWR

CPU OPE WDT

A

B

CPURST

20

ON
ALM
SLOT NO.

0

1

2

3

4

5

MEM(PZ-ME44)

Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System
CHAPTER 2
Page 26
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

6

ISAGT
(PZ-GT13)

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

[CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System]
PWR(PZ-PW92)
DSP(PZ-DK224)
ISAGT
(PZ-GT20)

LANI(PZ-PC22)

Note

PZ-PW92
DC-40V~-58.6V

A

B

SW
I

ON
MBR

O
-48V OUT

ON

OFF

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0

5A
125V
AC/DC

IMG0
IMG3

STATUS

4

SYSTEM SELECT1
PALM

SENSE

ON
1

12

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON
13

INPWR

IMG2

ON
1

OUTPWR

CPU OPE WDT

CPURST

20

ON
ALM
SLOT NO.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

ISAGT
(PZ-GT13)

Note:

This card is required when IMG2/6/10/14 and/or IMG3/7/11/15 is configured.
Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 27
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in
the IMG for 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system.
[Lamp Indications for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

LAMP NAME

COLOR

ON (PWR)

Green

Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR)

Red

Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD
(FDD/HDD)

Red

Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP)

Red

Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.

IMG1 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note

Note:

DESCRIPTION

No lamp indication in STBY mode.
The following shows lamp indications for the CPR in the ISW.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

ON (PWR)

Green

ALM (PWR)

Red

Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD (FDD/HDD)

Red

Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP)

Red

Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

IMG0 (DSP)

Green

IMG1 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG2 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG3 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note

Note:

DESCRIPTION
Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.
Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state.

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

CHAPTER 2
Page 28
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

LAMP
NAME

DESCRIPTION
Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the
SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment
LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS
SENSE

DESCRIPTION
LEFT

RIGHT

1. When Program Install

Not used

The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes
execute)

“F”
“c”
“d”

“F”indicated during HD format.
“c”indicated when copying data from FD to HD

1

“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD
2. When Program Load
Not used

After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to
memory.

“1”

“1” is indicated during this process.
3. On-line active CPR

STATUS
(DSP)

2

“0-9”

“0-9”

Not used

“S”
“b”
“y”

The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by
percentage. (00-99%)
4. On-line stand-by CPR
The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”
5. Program & Office data load

Not used “1”

“0”

“1”indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the
memory
“0” indicated during the Office data load

3

Not used

“c”

“c”indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

4

Not used

“d”

“d”indicated while making the directory on the HD
The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

5

Not used “1”

“0”

“1”indicated during the Program load.
“0”indicated during the process.

Note:

6

Not used

“F”

C

Not used

“H”

“F” indicated during HD format.
The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.
“H”indicated during the ROM data loading.

The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or “E” indicates
the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Indication

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 29
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the SP, CMP, and LP for IPX-UMG system.
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in SP]
LAMP NAME

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR)

Green

ALM (PWR)

Red

Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD (FDD/HDD)

Red

Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP)

Red

Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

IMG0 (DSP)

Green

IMG1 (DSP)

Green

Not used.

IMG2 (DSP)

Green

Not used.

IMG3 (DSP)

Green

Not used.

Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

Lights green when the CPU of the SP is in active state.
Remains OFF when the CPU is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in CMP]
LAMP NAME

COLOR

ON (PWR)

Green

ALM (PWR)

Red

Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

WDT (DSP)

Red

Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

IMG0 (DSP)

Green

IMG1 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW1 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

IMG2 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW2 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

IMG3 (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the TSW3 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

Note:

DESCRIPTION
Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

Lights green when the CPU of the CMP is in active state.
Lights green when the CPU is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

CHAPTER 2
Page 30
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in LP]
LAMP NAME

COLOR

ON (PWR)

Green

Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR)

Red

Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

WDT (DSP)

Red

Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP)

Green

Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.

IMG1 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG1/5/9/13 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG2/6/10/14 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP)

Green

Flashes green when IMG3/7/11/15 is mounted. Note

Note:

DESCRIPTION

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 31
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

LAMP
NAME

DESCRIPTION
Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the
SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment
LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS
SENSE

DESCRIPTION
LEFT

RIGHT

“0-9”

“0-9”

1. On-line active CPR
The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the
CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%)

Not used

“S”
“b”
“y”

2. On-line stand-by CPR
The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates
“S,” “b,” “y”

0
Not used

“0-F”

Not used “1”

STATUS
(DSP)

“0”

When the “EMA
SUP” switch is
“ON” on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.

4. Program & Office data load
“1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the
memory
“0” indicated during the Office data load

“F”
“c”
“d”

1. When Program Install
The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute)
“F” indicated during HD format.
“c” indicated when copying data from FD (Basic Software #1) to HD
“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

Not used

“1”

2. When Program Load
After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to
memory.
“1” is indicated during this process.

3

Not used

“c”

5

Not used “1”

C

Not used

Not used
1

Note:

3. Both active and stand-by CPR
The setting of SENSE switch is indicated.

When the “EMA
SUP” switch is
“OFF” on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.

“c”
“0”

“H”

indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).
“1” indicated during the Program load.
“0” indicated during the process.
The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.
“H” indicated during the ROM data loading.

The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates “E”
meaning the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Ind

CHAPTER 2
Page 32
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

5.

Switch Settings
[for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW
(PWR)

—

MB Note
(FDD/HDD)

—

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

OFF

PWR is supplied to the CPR.
PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

ON (Up)
OFF (Down)

MEANING

Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.
×

Normal setting.
Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is
located.

ON (Up)

MBR
(DSP)

—

CPURST
(DSP)

—

—

1

OFF

×

Not used.

2

OFF

×

Not used.

3

OFF

×

Not used.

SYSTEM
SELECT0
(DSP)

OFF (Down)

4

1

2
SYSTEM
SELECT1
(DSP)

3

4
5~7
8
SYSTEM
SELECT2
(DSP)
Note:

SETTING

1~8

×

Execute the CPR processing according to the
SENSE setting.

ON
OFF

Normal setting.

Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.
×

Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.

OFF

×

Fixed to “OFF.”

ON

IPX-U System

OFF

1IMG/4IMG System

OFF

×

Not used.

Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being
accessed.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 33
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

1

SENSE
(DSP)
Note

Note:

2

×

•

HD formatted

•

File copied from FDD to HD

•

Directory created on the HD

On-line mode.

3

File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD.

4

Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD.

5

OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading
the ROM data.

6

HD format of the FDD/HDD.

C

The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the
CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

CHAPTER 2
Page 34
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

[for IPX-UMG System]
SWITCH NAME

SWITC
H NO.

SW
(PWR)

—

MB Note
(FDD/HDD)

—

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

OFF

PWR is supplied to the CPR.
PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

ON (Up)
OFF (Down)

MEANING

Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.
×

Normal setting.
Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is
located.

ON (Up)

MBR
(DSP)

—

CPURST
(DSP)

—

—

1

ON

×

Fixed to “ON.”

2

OFF

×

Fixed to “OFF.”

SYSTEM
SELECT0
(DSP)

OFF (Down)

OFF

High Density system configuration (one LP
controls two IMGs)

2

3

4

×

ON
OFF

Normal setting.
Execute the CPR processing according to the
SENSE setting.

3

1

SYSTEM
SELECT1
(DSP)

×

ON

4

Note:

SETTING

Standard system configuration (one LP
controls four IMGs)
Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

×

Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.

ON

PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.

OFF

PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.

5~7

OFF

×

Fixed to “OFF.”

8

ON

×

Fixed to “ON.”

Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being
accessed. This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 35
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

1~4

OFF

×

MEANING
Not used.
Physical PBI Number (Equipment Number)
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

SYSTEM
SELECT2
(DSP)

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

5~8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

PBI No.

PBI 02 (SP)
PBI 04 (CMP)
PBI 30 (LP 00)
PBI 38 (LP 04) Note
PBI 40 (LP 08)
PBI 48 (LP 12) Note
PBI 50 (LP 16)
PBI 58 (LP 20) Note
PBI 60 (LP 24)
PBI 68 (LP 28) Note

Note 1: Physical PBI No. must be the same

on the CPR of system #0 and #1 in
dual configuration.
Note 2: This setting is required when the

system applies High Density system
configuration (i.e., a LP controls
two IMGs) only.
Note:

This switch setting is valid when the “EMA SUP” switch is ON (UP side).

CHAPTER 2
Page 36
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board
Note:

Refer to the following figure and table for the PBI Number and the Equipment Number for IPX-UMG
system. The same PBI Number must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual configuration.

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

IMG5

IMG6

IMG7

IMG9

IMG10

IMG11

IMG13

IMG14

IMG15

CMG
CMP

SP

LP00
IMG4

LP08
IMG8

LP16
IMG12

LP24

Processor Name

PBI No.

CPU Accommodation

SP

02

15

CMP

04

14

LP00 (IMG0)

30

0

LP08 (IMG4)

40

2

LP16 (IMG8)

50

4

LP24 (IMG12)

60

6

NDA-24296

Equipment No.

CHAPTER 2
Page 37
Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

0
Note 2

×

MEANING
On-line mode.
The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

1
Note 2
SENSE
(DSP)
Note 1

•

HD formatted

•

File copied from FDD to HD

•

Directory created on the HD

3
Note 2

File copied from FDD to HD/Connection Hold Restart. Note 3

5
Note 2

OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading
the ROM data.

C
Note 2

The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

Note 1: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
Note 2: This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.
Note 3: Connection Hold Restart is proceeded by initializing the system with the TOPU key.

CHAPTER 2
Page 38
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SW
(PWR)

OFF
ON

MB
(PWR:PZ-PW106)

ON

MB
(FDD/HDD)

ON

MBR
(DSP)
SYSTEM
SELECT0
(DSP)
SYSTEM
SELECT1
(DSP)
SYSTEM SELECT2
(DSP)

REMARKS

1234

ON

12345678

ON

12345678

ON

SENSE
(DSP)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 39
Revision 1.0

PH-GT09
Gate

PH-GT09
Gate
1.

General Function
The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The
CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.

PLO1
PLO0
TDSW13
TDSW I/O
Local Bus

TDSW03
TDSW I/O
Local Bus

TDSW12
TDSW02
TDSW11
TDSW01
TDSW10
TDSW00
MISC Bus
DLKC0

DLKC1
MISC
GT

GT

DSP

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

LANI

CPU

DSP

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPR #0

MISC Bus

CPU

LANI

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

CPR #1

EMA

MISC Bus

IOC/
MISC

Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System

CHAPTER 2
Page 40
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-GT09
Gate

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GT1

GT0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-10.

OPE/MB

MB
MBR

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 41
Revision 1.0

PH-GT09
Gate

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE/MB

Green

5.

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING
UP

MB

×

Normal setting
When the ACT side of GT’s MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of
TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When
the TSW is dual configuration.)

UP
×

DOWN

6.

MEANING
Make-busy of circuit card

DOWN

MBR
Note

Note:

STANDARD
SETTING

Normal setting.

Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on.
External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME
MB

MBR

CHAPTER 2
Page 42
Revision 1.0

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

ON

NDA-24296

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate
1.

General Function
The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface allowing the CPU board to control the TSW,
HSW, and PLO cards in the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also is
equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/
dual). This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

(IOGT0)
PH-GT10

(IOGT1)
PH-GT10

ISAGT BUS

LPM

ISAGT BUS
MISC

LANI
LANI

RES

CPU

ISAGT

IOC

LANI
ISAGT

CPU

LANI

EMA
MISC I/O BUS

Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 43
Revision 1.0

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate

ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

(IOGT0)
PH-GT10

(IOGT1)
PH-GT10

ISAGT BUS
P-BUS

CMP

ISAGT BUS
MMC

LANI
LANI

RES

CPU

MISC

ISAGT
MISC
I/O
BUS

PCI BUS

LANI

EMA

ISAGT

CPU

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2
Page 44
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LANI

MISC
I/O
BUS

P-BUS

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.

OPE/MB

MB
MBR
PWRALM
CA4L
COPY

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 45
Revision 1.0

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE/MB

MEANING
Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

OFF

This circuit card is in ST-BY state.

Red

Lights when this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

PWRALM

Red

Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal.

CA4L

Red

Lights when 4 MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty.

COPY

Green

5.

Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy

×

DOWN

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

UP

MBR

6.

SETTING

Make-busy request
×

DOWN

Make-busy request cancel

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME
MB

MBR

CHAPTER 2
Page 46
Revision 1.0

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

ON

NDA-24296

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer
1.

General Function
This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated
with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IPX-U/IPX-UMG system,
and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this processing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL management even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM
of any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration.
For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the “Feature
Programming Manual”.
• Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2]
• Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9]

This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of
LN0/LMG0.
IPX-U System/IPX-UMG System
LN 0/LMG0

(TSW 1)

LN 1/LMG1

ISW/CMG

(TSW 1)
TSW/HSW 1

TSW 0

(DLMX 1)

TSW/HSW 0

TSW 0

OUT

ATI

DLMX 0 Note
IN

(DLKC 1)
DLKC 0

ATI

(TSW 1)
(DLKC 1)

LN 2/LMG2

TSW 0

DLKC 0

ATI

(DLKC 1)
DLKC 0

: Circuit Card
(TSW 1)

: Circuit Card (No. 1 System)

LN 3/LMG3

TSW 0

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC
: BLF/TGBL data to ATI

ATI

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC
(No. 1 system)
(DLKC 1)

: BLF/TGBL data to ATI
(No. 1 system)

DLKC 0

BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible
TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp

Note:

IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW/CMG.
OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW/
CMG.
Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 47
Revision 1.0

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
When this circuit card is used in a single configuration.
Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

HW 6

DLMX

HW 2

DLMX

HW 1

DLMX

HW 0

DLMX

DLMX

DLMX
Highway Block

HW 7

HW 8

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.
This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.
To used this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.
Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same
Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a
DLMX card is mounted).
5. Only one DLMX card can be mounted when the system is composed of single configuration.

When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration.
Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DLMX #1

HW 7

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

HW 6

DLMX #0

HW 2

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

HW 1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

HW 0

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0
Highway Block

HW 8

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW).
This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23).
This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.
To use this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.
A maximum two DLMX cards (a pair of DLMX card) can be mounted when the system is a dual
configuration.

CHAPTER 2
Page 48
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer

3.

Face Layout of Lamps and Switches
The face layout of lamps and switches is shown below.

OPE
MB KEY

ACT
LOAD
PWALM
MNT

MODE

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
PA-PC94 Lamp Indications Reference

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

Green

Lights when this circuit card is in a active state.

OFF

Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state.

LOAD

OFF

Not used.

PWALM

Red

Lights when OBP alarm

ACT

STATE

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 49
Revision 1.0

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
No.

SETTING
UP

MB

MNT

6.

MEANING
Circuit card make-busy.

DOWN

Circuit card make-busy cancel

0

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF.

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF.

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF.

3

MODE

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

Make-busy-request.

OFF

Cancel the make-busy-request.
×

0
1-7

Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection)
Not used.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB
ON

MNT

MODE

CHAPTER 2
Page 50
Revision 1.0

3
2
1
0

0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power
1.

General Function
The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The 48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in
the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be
selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone
circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

PA-PW55-A (PWR)

DC-DC

DC-DC
+5V, +12V, -5V

RGU

RGU
CR (For LC)
HOW

HOW

REL

REL
HOW (For LC)

SUB
PWR

NFB

SUB
PWR

NFB

-48 V (For LC, TRK)
+80 V (For MWL)

-48 V
+80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 51
Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DPWR

(PA-PW54-A)

PIM

CHAPTER 2
Page 52
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.

PAPW54

)

-A

U
P

(

3.

-48V -48V
-48V
DC SW
IN
INPUT
CONN
+80VOUT
5A
125V
AC/DC

SW4
-48V SW

5.0
A

FUSE
MB

FUSE
0.5
A

RST

RGUOUT
0.5A
125V
AC/DC

-48VOUT
25A
AC250V
DC125V

25A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON
-48V ON
RGU ON
DC ON
OPE
CPU ALM
DC ALM
RGU ALM
HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 53
Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

+80V ON

Green

Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON

Green

Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON

Green

Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON

Green

Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE

Green

Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM

Red

Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM

Red

Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM

Red

Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM

Red

Lights when howler alarm.

5.

STATE

Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
No.

–48V SW

—

RESET

—

MB

—

1
SW4
2

6.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

DESCRIPTION
–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF

–48 V input power is not supplied.

PUSH

Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—

×

ON
OFF

Normal setting.
Make-busy of the circuit card.

×

ON

Normal setting.
Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF

×

Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

ON

×

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 54
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

1

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

2

ON

20 [Hz]
90 [Vrms]

SW4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 55
Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power
1.

General Function
The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.
The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card
in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and
voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a
Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

PA-PW55-B (PWR)

DC-DC

DC-DC
+5V, +12V, -5V

RGU

RGU
CR (For LC)
HOW

HOW

REL

REL
HOW (For LC)
SUB
PWR

SUB
PWR

NFB

NFB

-48 V (For LC, TRK)
+80 V (For MWL)

-48 V
+80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System

CHAPTER 2
Page 56
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DPWR
(PA-PW54-B)

PIM

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 57
Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19.

PAPW54

)

-B

(

U
P

-48V -48V
-48V
DC SW
IN
INPUT
CONN
+80VOUT
5A
125V
AC/DC

SW4

-48V SW

5.0
A

FUSE
MB

FUSE
0.5
A

RGUOUT
0.5A
125V
AC/DC

RST
-48VOUT
25A
AC250V
DC125V

20A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON
-48V ON
RGU ON
DC ON
OPE
CPU ALM
DC ALM
RGU ALM
HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 58
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

+80V ON

Green

Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON

Green

Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON

Green

Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON

Green

Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE

Green

Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM

Red

Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM

Red

Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM

Red

Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM

Red

Lights in the case of howler alarm.

5.

STATE

Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
No.

–48V SW

—

RESET

—

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

—

–48V input power is not supplied.

PUSH

Hardware reset of the circuit card.
×

ON
OFF

SW4
2

6.

Normal setting
Make busy of the circuit card.

×

ON
1

–48V input power is supplied.

OFF

—
MB

DESCRIPTION

Normal setting
Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF

×

Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

ON

×

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 59
Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

1

Circuit card make busy cancel

2

ON

20 [Hz]
90 [Vrms]

SW4

CHAPTER 2
Page 60
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-A
Power

PA-PW55-A
Power
1.

General Function
The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48
V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the
associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage
can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler
Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

PA-PW55-A (PWR)

DC-DC

DC-DC
+5V, +12V, -5V

RGU

RGU
CR (For LC)
HOW

HOW

REL

REL
HOW (For LC)
SUB
PWR

SUB
PWR

NFB

NFB
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
+80 V (For MWL)

-48 V
+80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 61
Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A
Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR
(PA-PW55-A)

PIM

CHAPTER 2
Page 62
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-A
Power

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

PAPW55

)

-A

U
P

(

3.

-48V -48V
-48V
DC SW
IN
INPUT
CONN
+80VOUT
5A
125V
AC/DC

SW4
-48V SW

5.0
A

FUSE
MB

FUSE
0.5
A

RST

RGUOUT
0.5A
125V
AC/DC

-48VOUT
25A
AC250V
DC125V

25A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON
-48V ON
RGU ON
DC ON
OPE
CPU ALM
DC ALM
RGU ALM
HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 63
Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A
Power

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

+80V ON

Green

Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON

Green

Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON

Green

Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON

Green

Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE

Green

Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM

Red

Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM

Red

Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM

Red

Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM

Red

Lights when howler alarm.

5.

STATE

Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
No.

–48 V SW

RESET

MB

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

—

SW4
2

DESCRIPTION
–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF

–48 V input power is not supplied.

PUSH

Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—

1

6.

SETTING

×

ON
OFF

Normal setting
Make-busy of the circuit card.

×

ON

Normal setting
Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF

×

Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

ON

×

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 64
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-A
Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

1

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

2

ON

20 [Hz]
90 [Vrms]

SW4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 65
Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B
Power

PA-PW55-B
Power
1.

General Function
The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.
The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card
in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output
frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card.
In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

PA-PW55-B (PWR)

DC-DC

DC-DC
+5V, +12V, -5V

RGU

RGU
CR (For LC)
HOW

HOW

REL

REL
HOW (For LC)
SUB
PWR

SUB
PWR

NFB

NFB
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
+80 V (For MWL)

-48 V
+80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System

CHAPTER 2
Page 66
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-B
Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR
(PA-PW55-B)

PIM

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 67
Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B
Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23.

PAPW55

)

-B

(

U
P

-48V -48V
-48V
DC SW
IN
INPUT
CONN
+80VOUT
5A
125V
AC/DC

SW4

-48V SW

5.0
A

FUSE
MB

FUSE
0.5
A

RGUOUT
0.5A
125V
AC/DC

RST
-48VOUT
25A
AC250V
DC125V

20A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON
-48V ON
RGU ON
DC ON
OPE
CPU ALM
DC ALM
RGU ALM
HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 68
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-B
Power

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

+80V ON

Green

Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON

Green

Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON

Green

Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON

Green

Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE

Green

Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM

Red

Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM

Red

Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM

Red

Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM

Red

Lights in the case of howler alarm.

5.

STATE

Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
No.

–48V SW

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

–48V input power is not supplied.

PUSH

Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—

×

ON
—
OFF

×

Normal setting
Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF

×

Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

ON

×

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

2
OFF

6.

Normal setting
Make busy of the circuit card.

ON
1
SW4

–48V input power is supplied.

OFF
RESET

MB

DESCRIPTION

Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 69
Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B
Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

1

Circuit card make busy cancel

2

ON

20 [Hz]
90 [Vrms]

SW4

CHAPTER 2
Page 70
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller
1.

General Function
The main functions of the PH-DK10 card are as follows:
(a) to send out the system operating status, alarm and clock information to the Display Panel.
(b) to collect the MJ/MN/SUP alarm information occurs on CMG and each LMG. In addition, by the
collected internal alarm information, this card controls the Audible and Visual Alarm Indicating
Panel.
(c) to collect the key information on the TOPU of CMG, then output it to EMA.
(d) to send out the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal from this card on the CMG to each LP.
Additionally, this card activates the communication between the processor in each LP and CMP, SP.
This circuit card is used in the IPX-UMG system.
Refer to the next page for the location of this circuit card within the system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 71
Revision 1.0

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

CMG
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)
LMG

ISEL

CMP
PH-M22
PH-M22

PH-PC43
PH-PC43
RECEIVER

RECEIVER

EMA

EMA

RELAY
RELAY

SP
PH-DK10
PH-PC43

LMG

EMA

PH-PC43
RECEIVER

RECEIVER

PH-M22
SEL

RELAY

EMA

RELAY

AUDIBLE
AND
VISUAL
ALARM
INDICATING
PANEL

DISPLAY
PANEL
(DSPP)

KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION
Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC)

CHAPTER 2
Page 72
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG.

Mounting Module

SP

00 01 02 03 04
DSPC

CPRAS-A

CPRAS-A

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-25.

OPE/MB

MB
CN8
CN7
CN6
CN5
CN4

To MMC on
LPR (CMP/LP)

CN3
CN2
CN1
CN0

KEY

To PZ-DK222
on the TOPU
of CMG

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 73
Revision 1.0

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE/MB

5.

Red

STATE
Lights when this circuit card is in operation.
Lights when this circuit card is in Make Busy state.

Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME
MB

CHAPTER 2
Page 74
Revision 1.0

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
DOWN

MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy

×

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

NDA-24296

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

6.

External Interface

DSPC (PH-DK10) : Slot No.00

Connected
to DSPP

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL
ALARM INDICATING PANEL

68PH DSPALM CA

SP

MDF
MISC0A
Connector

MN

Installation Cable

(BASEU)

BELL
RPT Terminal on front
of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05
-48V
(RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05
G
(RPT1)
68PH DSPALM CA and
Installation Cable

68PH DSPALM CA
68PH Connector
Champ Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

MPALM
SUPA1
EXTA
MNA1
BELL0
MJA1
MNA0
SUPA0
MJA0

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

SUPB1
MNB1
BELL1
MJB1
MNB0
SUPB0
MJB0

MJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

MNB
SUPB
MJB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

MDF

MPALM

6-BELL
8-MNA

BELL

9-SUPA

MNA
SUPA
MJA

MJ/MN/BELL

10-MJA
33-MNB
34-SUPB
35-MJB
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)

Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 75
Revision 1.0

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

CHAPTER 2
Page 76
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller
1.

General Function
The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C,
between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message
Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System
(PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is in
dual configuration.

Note:

Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

CPU
BOARD
#0

CPU
BOARD
GT #0

GT #1

#1

I/O

I/O

MISC
EMA

MISC I/O BUS

FDD/HDD #0

FDD/HDD #1
MISC/IOC

IOC

(RS-232C) x4 posts for MAT, SMDR, MCI, PMS, PRT

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 77
Revision 1.0

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The IOC cards can be placed in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.

Note:

Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

Mounting Module

LPM

00 01 02 03 04
IOC#0

IOC#1

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-28.

OPE
MB
MBR
IOC ALM

PORT0
PORT1
PORT2
PORT3
SW50

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 78
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller

4.

Lamp Indications
The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE/MB

Green

IOC ALM

This circuit card is operating normally.

Red

This circuit card is placed in the Make-busy state.

Red

Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor.

PORT0 - PORT3

5.

DESCRIPTION

RS-232C signal status indication.

SDn

Green

SD:

Send Data

RDn

Green

RD:

Receive Data

ERn

Green

ER:

Equipment Ready

DRn

Green

DR:

Data Ready

CDn

Green

CD:

Carrier Detect

n = port number (0-3)

Switch Settings
The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard
setting, it is indicated with “×” in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

Up

MB

Down

Down
1

2

2

3

4

DESCRIPTION
The circuit card is placed into Make-busy status.

×

Up

MBR

SW50

SETTING

Cancellation of Make-busy.
The circuit card is placed into Make-busy request status.

×

Cancellation of Make-busy Request.

ON

This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1.

OFF

This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.

ON
OFF

×

ON
OFF

Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only).

×

ON
OFF

×

ON
OFF

Not used (For Business System Only).

×

Free Wheeling.
Not used.

Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 79
Revision 1.0

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller

6.

External Interface
As illustrated in Figure 2-29, the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A cable is required to connect external equipment
such as the MAT, SMDR, MCI, and PRT.

Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below.
RS-232C cable (Note 2)
MISC 3B/2B (Note 1)
Backplane
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

TYP0

Circuit #0

To RS-232C
Terminal

AMP
AMP

Circuit #1

TYP1

PH-IO24
(IOC)

TYP0

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Circuit #2

TYP1

MISC 3A/2A (Note 1)
Circuit #3

Note 1: The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting
slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below.
Mounting Slot

IOC Circuit Number

MISC Connector

#0, #1

MISC 2B

#2, #3

MISC 2A

#0, #1

MISC 3B

#2, #3

MISC 3A

02

03
Note 2: The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or
whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the
connecting cables is explained in the “Installation Procedure
Manual”.

Pin
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

TYP0, 1 Connector
Signal name Pin Signal name
SD
26
RD
27
RS
28
CS
29
30
DR
31
SG
32
CD
ER
33
34
PB/CI
35
RT
ST1
36
37
ST2
38
39
40
41
42

TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation

Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)

CHAPTER 2
Page 80
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

MB

MBR
ON

Meaning of SW50-1:
12 34

SW50

ON:
OFF:

This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card.
This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 81
Revision 1.0

PH-M22
MMC

PH-M22
MMC
1.

General Function
The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are as follows:
•

to collect key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/the
other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. (for IPX-U system)

•

to collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU
display. (for IPX-U system)

•

to send out the key information to EMA within the same LMG (for IPX-UMG system)

•

to collect the external MJ/MN alarm information output by EMA in each LMG (for IPX-UMG system)

This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
LN
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)

ISW
PZ-DK227
(TOP KEY)

PH-M22
PH-PC40
RECEIVER

ISEL
PH-M22
PH-PC40
RECEIVER

SEL

EMA

EMA
RELAY

RELAY
LN
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)
PH-M22

AUDIBLE
AND
VISUAL
ALARM
INDICATING
PANEL

PH-PC40
RECEIVER

EMA

RELAY
KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System
CHAPTER 2
Page 82
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M22
MMC

CMG
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)

LMG

ISEL
CMP
PH-M22
PH-M22

PH-PC43
PH-PC43
RECEIVER

RECEIVER

EMA

EMA

RELAY
RELAY

SP
PH-DK10
PH-PC43

LMG

EMA

PH-PC43
RECEIVER

RECEIVER

PH-M22
SEL

RELAY

EMA

RELAY

AUDIBLE
AND
VISUAL
ALARM
INDICATING
PANEL

DISPLAY
PANEL
(DSPP)

KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION
Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 83
Revision 1.0

PH-M22
MMC

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module

LPM/CMP/LP

00 01 02 03 04
MMC

CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-32.

OPE

MB

CN7
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
CN0

KEY

Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)

CHAPTER 2
Page 84
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M22
MMC

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

5.

STATE
Lights when this circuit card is in operation.

Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME
MB

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
DOWN

MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy

×

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 85
Revision 1.0

PH-M22
MMC

6.

External Interface

MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL
ALARM INDICATING PANEL
68PH EXMISC CA

LPM

MDF
MISC0A
Connector

MN

(BASEU)

BELL
RPT Terminal on front
of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05
-48V
(RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05
G
(RPT1)
68PH EXMISC CA and
Installation Cable

68PH EXMISC CA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

MPALM
EXTAA
BELAA
MNAA
SUPAA
MJAA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

MDF
BELAA
MNAA
SUPAA
MJAA
MNBA
SUPBA
MJBA

MNBA
SUPBA
MJBA
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)

Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel
Note:

External connection for Alarm Indicator is not used in IPX-UMG system.

CHAPTER 2
Page 86
Revision 1.0

MJ

NDA-24296

MJ/MN/BELL

PH-M22
MMC

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

Note:

Normal operating mode is down.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 87
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

PH-M16
Line Test
1.

General Function
This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports
sending Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones,
and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.

Note:

A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/
automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.

LC

TEL

TSW
I
N
T
LC

TEL

PIM
LPRA

TEST
EQ

LTST

GT

CPU

EXTENDED I/O BUS

EXGT
EXTENDED I/O BUS

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System

CHAPTER 2
Page 88
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16
Line Test

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:

Note:

IPX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02.
IPX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)
Mounting Module

PH-M16

PH-M16

02

PH-M16

3.

00 01

03

LPM

04

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-35.

OPE/MB
MB

SW0

CRIN

Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card
Note:

CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 89
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

4.

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE/MB

5.

Red

DESCRIPTION
This circuit card is operating in normal mode.
This circuit card is Make-busy.

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

1

ON

×

Setting of a condition of DT detection
(440Hz+350Hz)

2

ON

×

Setting of a condition of RBT detection
(440Hz+480Hz)

3

ON
OFF

×

Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133 msec.)

ON

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with
sending test tone of ODT
(Set soft control or E-wire loop-back)

OFF

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with
sending test tone of ODT
(Set soft control only)

4

SW0

Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67 msec.)

5

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER
SW0

6

7

8

CHAPTER 2
Page 90
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

5

6

7

8

TIME

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

8µ

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

16 µ

ON

ON

ON

OFF

32 µ

ON

ON

ON

ON

64 µ

PH-M16
Line Test

6.

External Interface

MISC Connector Accommodation
Circuit Card Backboard Connector

Connector Name
02
PH-M16

PH-M16

LPM

00 01
PH-M16

Slot Number

03

04

LPM Backboard
MISC

Circuit Card Backboard Connector
MISC CONNECTOR
68PH EXMISC CABLE

MISC CONNECTOR
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

TE
TELB
LCB
THOWB
THOWS
SE
ATB
OUTB
TB1

INB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

TM
TELA
LCA
THOWA
ONHK
TCR
ATM
ATA
OUTA
TA1

INA

Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 91
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

PBX

LTST

TLT

LC

MDP
TM
TE
OUTA
OUTA
INA
INB
TA1
TB1

E
M
RA
RB
TA
TB
A
B

Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON (MB)

MB

OFF

ON

12 3456 78

SW0

CHAPTER 2
Page 92
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

PH-PC36
Multiplexer
1.

General Function
The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between
the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface
for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this
circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
information and digital data information.

LC/TRK

MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS

PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW/INT/PLO
MUX

PM
LC/TRK

MUX

CPR
GT

PM

PM
LC/TRK

PCM HW
PM BUS

PM

Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 93
Revision 1.0

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

PCM HW
MUX
TDSW
13
TDSW
03

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM
IMG 3

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX
TDSW
12
TDSW
02

CPR 0
ISAGT

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM
IMG 2

PCM HW
MUX

CPR 1
ISAGT

PM BUS

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
GT 1

MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX

GT 0
TDSW
11
TDSW
01

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM
IMG 1

PCM HW
MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

PCM HW
DLKC 1

MUX

DLKC 0

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX
TDSW
10
TDSW
00

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0

Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM

Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System

CHAPTER 2
Page 94
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX00

MUX10

MUX01

MUX11

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX02

MUX12

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX03

MUX13

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK
TSW00
TSW10
DLKC0
DLKC1

MUX

LN/LMG

MUX
TSW01
TSW11

PLO 0

PLO 1
TSW02
TSW12

TSW03
TSW13

TSW00 HSW00
HSW10 TSW10

ISWM

TSW01 HSW01
HSW11 TSW11

TSW02
TSW12

TSW03
TSW13
PLO 0
PLO 1

Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 95
Revision 1.0

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

The PCM highway running is illustrated in Figure 2-40. There are sixteen 2 Mbps PCM highways (HW0 HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance,
highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the
Group number 0, 1, 2 and 3.
Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the group numbers 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Group
number 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM).
All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway × 16 highways
= 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW
circuit card across the 32.786 Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS).
Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/
trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX.
In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits
of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in Time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).
Slot number of the PIM U-A

8 circuits of CFTs

Group (G) number of the LENS

22

23

19 18

23 22

13 12

17

21

16

20

20

16

12

21
15 14

6

20

10

7

4

19

11

18

8

17

9

16

5

13

15

2

15 14

10

14

3

11

8

13

0

9

6

12

1

7

4

11

MUX#1

10

MUX#0

09

21

08

23 22

07

17

06

19 18

05

5

PWR

PWR

04

2

03

3

02

0

01

1

00

HW5
HW4
HW10
31

HW14

Group 24 and 25 are used
for the SPM

HW15

2 Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway

Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running

CHAPTER 2
Page 96
Revision 1.0

HW11 HW12 HW13

30

HW9

28

28

30

29

26

HW7

HW8

29

HW3

31

27

(25)

(24)
HW6

HW2

26

HW1

27

HW0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3.
For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MUX #1

MUX #0

PIM

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-41.

MUXACT
MB
SYNC
RCLK ALM
PMCLK ALM
CFT OPE
ON OFF
4
3
2
1
SW01

MUX

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 97
Revision 1.0

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

MUX ACT

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

SYNC

Green

Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the
MUX and TSW.

RCLK ALM

Red

Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred.
Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred.

PMCLK ALM

Red

CFT OPE

5.

Green

•

2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks)

•

Frame Head signal

•

4 Mbps clock signals

Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

DOWN
1

CHAPTER 2
Page 98
Revision 1.0

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

SW01

SETTING

2

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

ON

3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid.

OFF

3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid.

ON

Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.

OFF

×

Setting µ-Law in the CFT function block.

3

OFF

×

Not used.

4

OFF

×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

6.

External Interface
For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-42.

PIM 3
MT24 TSW CA-180
MUX
#0

MUX
#1

PIM 2
MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX
#0

MUX
#1

PIM 1

MT24 TSW CA-90
MUX
#0

MUX
#1

TSW
#0

TSW
#1

PIM 0

Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 99
Revision 1.0

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-43. As seen in this illustration,
the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the “MUX###” connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB)
of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for more details.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 0

PIM 0

PIM 0

PIM 0

LPM

TSWM

Dummy/APM

Dummy

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

BWB of TSWM

Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW

CHAPTER 2
Page 100
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36
Multiplexer

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

ON

SW01

12 34

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 101
Revision 1.0

PH-PC20
Data Link Controller

PH-PC20
Data Link Controller
1.

General Function
This circuit card simultaneously provides all Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-IMG
system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, or
the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.

TSW
ATTCON
ISAGT0

ISAGT1
ATTCON

ISA BUS

CPU0
GT0

DLKC0

CPU1

GT1

MISC I/O BUS

Note

DLKC1

Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System
Note:

2.

MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the
DLKC.
Mounting Location/Conditions
Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DLKC#1

DLKC#0

CHAPTER 2
Page 102
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC20
Data Link Controller

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-45.

OPE/MB
MB
PWR ALM

Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE/MB
PWR ALM

5.

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is
abnormal.

Red

Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

MB

6.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

External Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 103
Revision 1.0

PH-PC20
Data Link Controller

No cable connections are required.
7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

CHAPTER 2
Page 104
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller
1.

General Function
The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and
sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the
system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the
CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold
sending function, too.

I/O Local Bus

I/O Local Bus

CPR #1

CPR #0

DSP

CPU

DSP

GT

GT

CPU

EMA

MISC Bus # 0

IOC

MISC Bus # 1

MISC

Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 105
Revision 1.0

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.

Mounting Module

LPM

00 01 02 03 04
PH-IO24 (IOC)

3.

PH-PC40 (EMA)

LPM

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-47.

OPE/MB

MB
ACT1
CKERR1
ACT0
CKERR0
EMASUP
EMASUP
CPU SEL

SW65

NMI SEL
SW73
SW92

SW62
SW70

SW A0

Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 106
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE/MB

Red

ACT1

Green

CKERR 1

Red

ACT0

Green

CKERR 0

Red
Green

EMSUP

5.

OFF

STATE
Indicates the circuit card is operating normally.
Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state.
CPU #1 is in the ACT state.
CPU #1 clock failure has occurred.
CPU #0 is in the ACT state.
CPU #0 clock failure has occurred.
Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .)
Enable to the CPU change-over.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MEANING
Make-busy of the circuit card.

MB
DOWN

Normal setting.

UP
EMASUP
DOWN

Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.
×

UP
CPUSEL

MIDDLE

Forced activating the CPU #1.
×

DOWN

Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when
a fault occurs.

NMISEL

Note:

Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note
Forced activating the CPU #0.

UP
DOWN

Normal setting.

×

Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.

Set CPUSEL switch downward, if a single CPU system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 107
Revision 1.0

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1
OFF

×

ON
2
OFF

×

ON
OFF

×

ON
4

Power Shut Down (PSDN) function
(used in Australia only)
SW62

SW62
3

MEANING

OFF

×

ON

×

1

ON

SW62-1

IMG#0 valid

IMG0# invalid

SW62-2

IMG#1 valid

IMG1# invalid

SW62-3

IMG#2 valid

IMG2# invalid

SW62-4

IMG#3 valid

IMG3# invalid

Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this
circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration).

OFF

CPU-ACT Signal does not output.

ON

Not used.

2
OFF

×

OFF

Not used.

SW65
ON

Dual CPU configuration.

OFF

Single CPU configuration.

3

ON

×

4

PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the
TOPU.

OFF

PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU.

ON

External music on hold source (FM lead) is used.

OFF

Internal music on hold source IC is used.

ON

Output the alarm information for the external indicator
(used in Australia only).

1
SW70
2
OFF

×

Alarm information does not output.

ON

×

Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid.

1
OFF
SW73
ON

PFT control is invalid.
×

µ-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

2
OFF

CHAPTER 2
Page 108
Revision 1.0

A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

NDA-24296

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

1

SETTING

SW92-1

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

SW92-2

Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF

OFF

600 Ω

ON

OFF

8.2 Ω

OFF

ON

47K Ω

SW92-1

SW92-2

2
SW92
Note
3

4

Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF

OFF

600 Ω

ON

OFF

8.2 Ω

OFF

ON

47K Ω

MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF.
1
SWA0-1

SWA0
Note

SWA0-3

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

OFF

Für Elise

ON

OFF

OFF

Maiden’s prayer

Don’t care

OFF

ON

Buzzer

Don’t care

ON

OFF

Chime

2

3

SWA0-2

ON
4
OFF

Not used
×

Not used

5
6

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this
circuit card.

7
ON
8
OFF
Note:

Not used
×

Not used

SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 109
Revision 1.0

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

6.

External Interface
External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external
equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-48.

EMA
(Slot No.04)

EALM Connector
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL
ALARM INDICATING PANEL

Installation
Cable

LPM

MDF

MJ
MN

16PH EXALM CA
(BASEU)

BELL
RPT Terminal on front
of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05
-48V
(RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05
G
(RPT1)

CABLING DIAGRAM

16PH EXALM CA
26 E
1
2
27 E
28 3
4
29 MJB
30 MNA
5
31 6
7
32
33
8
34
9

FM0
FM0
FM1
MPALM
MJA
MNA
BELL

E

MDF

EXTERNAL
MUSIC
SOURCE

MJA
MNA

MJ/MN/BELL

BELL
MJB
MNB
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)

50

EXTA

25

EXTB
CROSS CONNECTION

Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold

CHAPTER 2
Page 110
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

ON

EMA-SUP

ON

CPU-SEL

ON

NMI-SEL

SWA0

REMARKS

ON

12 34 56 78

12 34

ON

12 34

ON

12

ON

12

ON

12 34

ON

SW62

SW65

SW70

SW73

SW92

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 111
Revision 1.0

PH-PW14
Power Switch

PH-PW14
Power Switch
1.

General Function
This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted
in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5
V, and +12 V to MISC slots.
The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.

PWR SW #0
FET Switch

FUSE

PWR SW #1
FUSE

Load
Controller
-48V IN
Switch

DCDC

DCDC

Load

-48V

Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram

CHAPTER 2
Page 112
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Controller

PH-PW14
Power Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).
Mounting Module

TSWM/ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR SW#1

PWR SW#0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-50.

P-ON
ALM

SW

-48V in Fuse
(125V AC/DC 15A)

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 113
Revision 1.0

PH-PW14
Power Switch

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

P-ON

Green

ALM

Red

5.

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

SW

MEANING
The card supplies the operating power to various circuit
cards.

OFF

6.

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

CHAPTER 2
Page 114
Revision 1.0

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

00
01

SW

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

NDA-24296

REMARKS

-48 V operating power is supplied to various circuit cards.

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch
1.

General Function
This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT.
The TSW capacity is 2048×2048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IPX
configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port
Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.

[Connection diagram of the TSW]

MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS

LC/TRK

PCM HW
PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW/INT/PLO
CPR
MUX

GT

[Function block diagram]

From EMA
MUSIC

PCM HW
PM BUS

LVDS

TSW

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX

INT
D
T
G

MUX

LC/TRK

CFT

PLO

PH-SW10
DTI

DCS

Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 115
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

Figure 2-52 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).
OSC#1 (PA-CK14)

DCS 1

PLO

TSW

TSW#1 (PH-SW10)
DCS 0
DCS 0
DIU 0
DIU 1
DIU 2
DIU 3

DCS 1
PLO
TSW

TSW#0 (PH-SW10)
OSC#0 (PA-CK14)
Multiple connection on MDF

Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram

When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required,
and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When
the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (±5 ppm deviation) can be the
base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the
digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another
clock source automatically in the order of:
1. DCS0
2. DCS1
3. DIU0
4. DIU1
5. DIU2
6. DIU3
7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator

CHAPTER 2
Page 116
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
•

32.768 MHz CLK

•

8 KHz FH

•

5 msec × “n” FH (for wireless module).

The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it
sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3.
This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The
TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the
EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a
tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down
connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.)
Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight
circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.
[Voice Prompt sending for Tone]

[Voice Prompt sending for Music]

Speech Path Memory

Speech Path Memory
Tone

TONE ROM
Tone source selected by office data

MUSIC from EMA

Music

Music source selected by office data

[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory]
[SPM for music channel 16-29]
MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7

PIM 3

MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5

Note

[SPM for music channel 0-15]
MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7

PIM 2

MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 16-31]
MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7
PIM 1

MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 0-15]
MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7
PIM0

MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.
Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 117
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in PIM number zero (0) of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW #1

TSW #0

PIM0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-54.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TSWACT
MUXACT

SW11

PLOACT
MB
TSWMBR
PLOMB

SW12
M3SY
M2SY
M1SY
M0SY

PMCA

CFT
PMJ
PMN
SYNC
ICK
ECK
SW03

SW04

MUX3
MUX2
MUX1

Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)

CHAPTER 2
Page 118
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

TSWACT

STATE
Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red

Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off

Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

MUXACT

Green

Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state.

PLOACT

Green

Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state.

M3SY

Green

Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY

Green

Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY

Green

Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY

Green

Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established.

PMCA

Red

Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred.

CFT

Green

Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

PMJ

Red

•

All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock
subordinate office

•

32.768 MHz output clock failure

•

8 KHz output FH failure

•

5 msec × “n” output FH failure

•

Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•

Both internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm
deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
PMN

Yellow

•

One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•

Drifting failure

•

Internal OSC (±5 ppm) failure

•

High-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm) failure

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 119
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch
LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

STATE
Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
Remains off when any of the following have occurred.

SYNC

OFF

•

DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•

DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•

Drifting failure

Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally.
ICK

Green

ECK

Green

Note 1: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is
operational.
Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card
(PA-CK14).
Note 2: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB
DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy.
×

UP
TSWMBR
DOWN

SW12

CHAPTER 2
Page 120
Revision 1.0

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
TSW Make-busy request.

×

UP
PLOMBR

MEANING

TSW Make-busy request cancel.
PLO Make-busy request.

DOWN

×

PLO Make-busy request cancel.

1-F

1

Fixed to “1.”

NDA-24296

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid.

OFF

3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid.

ON

Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.

1

2
SW03

3

OFF

×

Setting of µ-law in the CFT function block.

OFF

×

Fixed.
Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM
1/2/3). Note

ON
4
OFF

×

TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in
PIM 0).

ON

DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF

DIU 0 is not used.

ON

DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF

DIU 1 is not used.

ON

DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF

DIU 2 is not used.

ON

DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF

DIU 3 is not used.

1

2

3

4
SW04
ON

×

1.5 M clock for DIU 0

5
OFF
ON

2 M clock for DIU 0
×

1.5 M clock for DIU 1

6
OFF
ON

2 M clock for DIU 1
×

1.5 M clock for DIU 2

7
OFF
ON

2 M clock for DIU 2
×

1.5 M clock for DIU 3

8
OFF
Note:

2 M clock for DIU 3

When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a connection to TSW (Don’t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED
is not lit. In this mode, only SW03 is valid.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 121
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.

OFF

PLO operates as the clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,
the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,
the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON

This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m
Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF

This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

ON

(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE”)

1

2

3

4
SW11

5

6

7
8

CHAPTER 2
Page 122
Revision 1.0

OFF

×

(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF”)

OFF

×

Not used

NDA-24296

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

6.

External Interface
When this circuit card is used in “clock subordinate office,” clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be
extracted. See Figure 2-56 for more information. When this circuit card is used in “clock source office,”
cable connections are not necessary.

Mounting Module

PIM

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

DCSB0
DIU0B0
DIU1B0
DIU2B0
DIU3B0
SYN0B0
SYN1B0

DCSB1
DIU0B1
DIU1B1
DIU2B1
DIU3B1
SYN0B1
SYN1B1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

DCSA0
DIU0A0
DIU1A0
DIU2A0
DIU3A0
SYN0A0
SYN1A0

DCSA1
DIU0A1
DIU1A1
DIU2A1
DIU3A1
SYN0A1
SYN1A1

Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 123
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

PBX

CCT/DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT/DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT/DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT/DTI
/PRT

POUT A

TSW #0

DCSA0
DCSB0
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

TSW #1

Note:

MDF

POUT B

DCS

DCSA1
DCSB1
DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB),
DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).
Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 2
Page 124
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-57.

PIM 3
MT24 TSW CA-180
MUX
#0

MUX
#1

PIM 2
MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX
#0

MUX
#1

PIM 1

MT24 TSW CA-90
MUX
#0

MUX
#1

TSW
#0

TSW
#1

PIM 0

Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 125
Revision 1.0

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

ON

TSWMBR

ON

PLOMB

12 34

ON

SW03

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

SW04

SW11

SW12

CHAPTER 2
Page 126
Revision 1.0

1

NDA-24296

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch
1.

General Function
This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW
card is capable of 8192 × 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards
allow 8192 × 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration.
The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administers the Port Microprocessor
(PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.
[TSW configuration]
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3

TSW
(8Kx2K)

IMG0

TSW
(8Kx2K)

IMG1

TSW
(8Kx2K)

IMG2

TSW
(8Kx2K)

IMG3

[INT configuration]
STBY

ACT
CPU1(LP)

ISAGT1

ISA BUS

GT1

MUX01
TSW1
(INT)

I/O BUS

PM BUS
LC/TRK(PM)

MUX00
STBY

System #1

ACT
STBY

System #0
MUX31
ISA BUS
CPU0(LP)

I/O BUS

ISAGT0

PM BUS

TSW0
(INT)

GT0

LC/TRK(PM)

MUX30
STBY

ACT

ACT

Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 127
Revision 1.0

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring
Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is
located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card.
Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of
PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.

FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM

PLO#1
FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM
TONE ROM
PLO#0
SEL
SEL
TONE ROM

Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW1

SEL
SEL
Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW00

Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion

CHAPTER 2
Page 128
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

[SPM for music channel 16-29]
MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

PIM 3

MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5
Note
[SPM for music channel 0-15]
MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

PIM 2

MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7
[SPM for tone channel 16-31]
MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

PIM 1

MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7
[SPM for tone channel 0-15]
MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

PIM0

MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

Note :

MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.
Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IPX-U system accommodates two
TSWMs (TSWM0/1).
Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW 13

TSW 12

TSW 11

TSW 10

TSW 03

TSW 02

TSW 01

TSW 00

TSWM

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 129
Revision 1.0

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

The definitions for the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below.
•

4-IMG System
SYMBOL

SYSTEM

CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

IMG 0

TSW01

IMG 1
0

TSW02

IMG 2

TSW03

IMG 3

TSW10

IMG 0

TSW11

IMG 1
1

•

TSW12

IMG 2

TSW13

IMG 3

IPX-U system
This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U system.
•

For the card in TSWM0
SYMBOL

SYSTEM

FUNCTION

TSW00

CONTROLLED IMG
IMG 0

Collects the PCM data
TSW01

IMG 1
0

TSW02

IMG 0
Sends the PCM data to the ISW

TSW03

IMG 1

TSW10

IMG 0
Collects the PCM data

TSW11

IMG 1
1

TSW12

IMG 0
Sends the PCM data to the ISW

TSW13

CHAPTER 2
Page 130
Revision 1.0

IMG 1

NDA-24296

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

•

For the card in TSWM1
SYMBOL

SYSTEM

TSW00
TSW01
TSW02

TSW13

3.

IMG 2
IMG 3

0

IMG 2

Sends the PCM data to the ISW

TSW10

TSW12

CONTROLLED IMG

Collects the PCM data

TSW03

TSW11

FUNCTION

IMG 3
IMG 2

Collects the PCM data

IMG 3

1

IMG 2

Sends the PCM data to the ISW

IMG 3

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-61.

TSWACT

MB
TSWMBR
M3SY
M2SY
M1SY
M0SY
PLO 1
PLO 0

TONE

Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 131
Revision 1.0

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

TSWACT

5.

STATE
Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red

Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off

Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

M3SY

Green

Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY

Green

Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY

Green

Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY

Green

Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established.

PLO 1

Green

Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1.

PLO 0

Green

Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

UP

Circuit card Make-busy.

MB

×

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

UP

TSW Make-busy request.

TSWMBR

×

DOWN
SWITCH
NAME

TONE

6.

TSW Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

1

OFF

×

2

ON
OFF

MEANING
Fixed.
(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE.”)

×

(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF.”)

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.

CHAPTER 2
Page 132
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

ON

TSWMBR

TONE

1 2

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 133
Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch
1.

General Function
The PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for
the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PUSW00/PU-SW00-A cards and two PU-SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS)
switching for four (4) LNs/LMGs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW/CMG.

[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW
2M PCM HW x8

MUX00

MUX10
2M PCM HW x8

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

MUX02

MUX12

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

MUX03

MUX13

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

MUX11

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

MUX01

LC/TRK

32M TSW
Matrix HW

TSW00
TSW10

LC/TRK

32M TSW
Matrix HW

LC/TRK

DLKC0
DLKC1

MUX
MUX
TSW01
TSW11
32.768MHz Clock
DCS
PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock
DCS
PLO 1
TSW02
TSW12

32M SERIAL HW
x4

TSW03
TSW13

32M SERIAL HW
x4

32M SERIAL HW
x4

32M SERIAL HW
x4
TSW00 HSW00
HSW10 TSW10

TSW01 HSW01
HSW11 TSW11

TSW02
TSW12

TSW03
TSW13

64KHz
Clock

PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock

32.768MHz Clock

Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

CHAPTER 2
Page 134
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PLO 1

64KHz
Clock

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

[INT Configuration]
ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

ISAGT BUS

LPM

ISAGT BUS
MISC

LANI
LANI

RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

CPU

IOC

ISAGT

LANI
ISAGT

CPU

LANI

EMA
MISC I/O BUS

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 135
Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

[INT Configuration]
ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT BUS
P-BUS

CMP

ISAGT BUS
MMC

LANI
LANI

RES

CPU

MISC

ISAGT
MISC
I/O
BUS

PCI BUS

LANI

EMA

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

MISC
I/O
BUS

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2
Page 136
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

P-BUS

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW (13)

TSW (12)

TSW (11)

TSW (10)

TSW (03)

TSW (02)

TSW (01)

TSW (00)

Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-64.

TSWACT
TSW MB
TSW MBR
PWPALM
HCKALM
LN33
LN32
LN31
LN30
LN23
LN22
LN21
LN20
LN13
LN12
LN11
LN10
LN03
LN02
LN01
LN00
1 2 3 4

3.

SWE5

Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 137
Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR
Green

STATE
Lights when the TDSW block is active.

TSWACT
Red

Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state.

PWPALM

Red

Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

HCKALM

Red

Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card.

LN33

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN32

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN31

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN30

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN23

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN22

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN21

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN20

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN13

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN12

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN11

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN10

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN03

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN02

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN01

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN00

Green

Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

CHAPTER 2
Page 138
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch

5.

Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

MEANING

UP

Circuit card Make-busy.

TSW MB

×

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

UP

Circuit card Make-busy request.

TSW MBR

×

DOWN

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

1
SWE5

6.

Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.

OFF

MEANING
LN (Local Node)/LMG (Local Module Group) connection mode.
MUX connection mode.

2

OFF

×

Not used.

3

OFF

×

Not used.

4

OFF

×

Not used.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

TSW MB

ON

TSW MBR

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 139
Revision 1.0

PU-SW01
Highway Switch

PU-SW01
Highway Switch
1.

General Function
The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, supports the following
functions.
(a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the
space division is composed with this circuit card.
(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one
card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.

[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW
2M PCM HW x8

MUX00

MUX10

MUX01

MUX11

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

MUX02

MUX12

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

MUX03

MUX13

LC/TRK
LC/TRK
2M PCM HW x8

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8
LC/TRK

LC/TRK

32M TSW
Matrix HW

TSW00
TSW10

LC/TRK

32M TSW
Matrix HW

LC/TRK

DLKC0
DLKC1

MUX
MUX
TSW01
TSW11
32.768MHz Clock
DCS
PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock
DCS
PLO 1
TSW02
TSW12

32M SERIAL HW
x4

TSW03
TSW13

32M SERIAL HW
x4

32M SERIAL HW
x4

32M SERIAL HW
x4
TSW00 HSW00
HSW10 TSW10

TSW01 HSW01
HSW11 TSW11

TSW02
TSW12

TSW03
TSW13

64KHz
Clock

PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock

32.768MHz Clock

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW)

CHAPTER 2
Page 140
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PLO 1

64KHz
Clock

PU-SW01
Highway Switch

[INT Configuration]
ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

ISAGT BUS

LPM

ISAGT BUS
MISC

LANI
LANI

RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

CPU

IOC

ISAGT

LANI
ISAGT

CPU

LANI

EMA
MISC I/O BUS

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 141
Revision 1.0

PU-SW01
Highway Switch

[INT Configuration]
ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0

RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT BUS
P-BUS

CMP

ISAGT BUS
MMC

LANI
LANI

RES

CPU

MISC

ISAGT
MISC
I/O
BUS

PCI BUS

LANI

EMA

ISAGT

CPU

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2
Page 142
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LANI

MISC
I/O
BUS

P-BUS

PU-SW01
Highway Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots are the shaded parts
shown below.
Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW (11)

HSW (10)

HSW (01)

HSW (00)

3.

Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-66.

HSWACT
MB

PWRALM
CKALF
CKALE
CKALD
CKALC
CKALB
CKALA
CKAL9
CKAL8
CKAL7
CKAL6
CKAL5
CKAL4
CKAL3
CKAL2
CKAL1
CKAL0

Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 143
Revision 1.0

PU-SW01
Highway Switch

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

STATE
Lights when the HSW block is active.

HSWACT
PWPALM

Red

Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state.

Red

Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

Green

Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALF
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALE
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALD
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALC
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALB
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALA
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL9
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL8
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL7
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL6
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL5
Off
Green

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL4
Off

CHAPTER 2
Page 144
Revision 1.0

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

NDA-24296

PU-SW01
Highway Switch
LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

STATE
Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL3
Off

Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Green

Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL2
Off

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Green

Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL1
Off

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Green

Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL0
Off

5.

Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Switch Settings
Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

Circuit card Make-busy.

MB
DOWN

6.

MEANING

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

External Interface
No cable connections are required.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 145
Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1.

General Function
The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the
TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR
to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this
circuit card onto the CPR.
PLO1
PLO0
TSW13
TDSW I/O
Local Bus

TSW03
TDSW I/O
Local Bus

TSW12
TSW02
TSW11
TSW01
TSW10
TSW00

MISC

DLKC0

DLKC1

GT

GT

DSP

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

LANI

CPU

DSP

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPR #0

MISC I/O Bus

CPU

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

CPR #1

EMA

MISC I/O Bus

IOC/
MISC

Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CHAPTER 2
Page 146
Revision 1.0

LANI

NDA-24296

PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

ISWM
RES

RES

HSW01

HSW11

HSW00

HSW10

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 0
(IOGT0)
PH-GT10

RES

(IOGT1)
PH-GT10

ISAGT BUS

LPM

ISAGT BUS
MISC

LANI
LANI

RES

(ISAGT)
PZ-GT13

CPU

IOC

LANI
(ISAGT)
PZ-GT13

CPU

LANI

EMA
MISC I/O BUS

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW)

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-69.
Mounting Module

LPM
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPU BOARD
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 147
Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-70. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

PMG

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

4.

External Interface
This card has no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 148
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

DSPP

CONN

A B

PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1.

General Function
The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which
permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industry Standard
Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.

TSW

TSW

I/O Local Bus

I/O Local Bus

DSP

DSP

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

LANI

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPR#0

CPU

LANI

To HUB

LANI

To HUB

CPR#1

MISC Bus

MISC Bus
EMA

IOC/
MISC

Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 149
Revision 1.0

PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-72.
Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT16 (GT)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16

CHAPTER 2
Page 150
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-73. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

PMG

DSPP

CONN
A B

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

4.

Lamp Indications
This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 151
Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1.

General Function
The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus
located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW,
MUX cards of IMG2, 3/6, 7/10, 11/14, 15 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used
for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
CLK 1

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS

CLK 0

PH-GT09
(IOGT0)

PH-GT09
(IOGT1)
TSWM#1 (IMG2/6/10/14)
TSW03

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
MISC

GT-BUS

ISA BUS

PZ-GT20
(ISAGT)

LANI
LANI

CPU#0

PH-GT09 GT-BUS
(IOGT1)
TSWM#0 (IMG1/5/9/13)

PH-GT09
(IOGT0)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

MMC
EMA

PZ-GT20
(ISAGT)

ISA BUS
LANI

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

CPU#1

LANI

IOC/
MISC
LPM (IMG0/4/8/12)

Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)
CHAPTER 2
Page 152
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-75.
Mounting Module LP(IMG0/4/8/12)

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-PC19/PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)

Note:

FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of LP in IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-76. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 153
Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

4.

External Interface
This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 154
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-M565
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-M565
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1.

General Function
This circuit card has the relay functions as mentioned below:
(a) to receive the NMI (Non-Maskable Interruption) signal from the PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card, then
output it to ISA Bus.
(b) to receive the ACT signal from the EMA card, then output it to PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card.
This card is used in IPX-UMG system connecting the two cards on CPU#0 and #1 in CMP with a bus cable.

PCI BUS

PCI
MEM

PCI
MEM

ISA BUS

PZ-M565
(ISAGT2)

PZ-M565
(ISAGT2)

PCI BUS

ISA BUS

LANI
LANI

LANI
CPU#0

EMA

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

CPU#1

LANI

MISC
DSPC
/MMC

CMP

Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-M565 (ISAGT) card is mounted in PCI Slot No.05 on CPU Board within the CMP of IPX-UMG
system as shown in Figure 2-78.
CMP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V
SW
ON
I

-58.6
CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2
O

IMG3

OFF

5.0
A

5A
125V
AC/DC

PALM

OUTPWR
ON

PZ-M565

ALM
INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 155
Revision 1.0

PZ-M565
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown below.

CONN

Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card

4.

Lamp Indications
This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX 2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 156
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-ME44
PCI Memory

PZ-ME44
PCI Memory
1.

General Function
Mounted on CPU Board of CMP in IPX-UMG system, this circuit card provides the Memory Copy
function related to ACT/ST-BY system changeover.
I/O Local Bus

I/O Local Bus

CPR #0

CPR #1

PCI MEM

PCI MEM
DSP

DSP

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

ISAGT2

CPU

ISAGT2

EMA
MISC Bus #0

MISC Bus #1
MISC
DPSC
/MMC

Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card is mounted in PCI Slot No. 02 on CPU Board of CMP as shown in Figure
2-81.
PZ-PW92
DC-40V
SW
ON
I

-58.6
CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2
O

IMG3

OFF

5.0
A

5A
125V
AC/DC

PALM

OUTPWR
ON
ALM
INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-ME44
Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 157
Revision 1.0

PZ-ME44
PCI Memory

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors and lamps is shown in Figure 2-82.

COPY

SOFT

WE

Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

Green

Copy mode

OFF

Self mode

COPY
Green
SOFT
OFF
WE

5.

Green

Normally operating in copy mode (Valid when “copy” lamp lights)
Remains OFF during ACT → STBY memory copy
Lights when Memory writing

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 158
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CONN

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface
1.

General Function
The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).

To another Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

FCCH

HUB

HUB

10-BASE-T

DSP

CPU

LANI

DSP

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

LANI

LANI
CPR #0

CPR #1

PCI
10-BASE-T

HUB

MAT
IMX

NIC

Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 159
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-84.

Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-85.

PCI BUS INTERFACE

10 BASE-T

EST0
EST1
EST2
EST3

Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 160
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

EST0

Green

Layer 1 link has established.

EST1

Green

Data packet sending/receiving.

EST2

Red

EST3

Yellow

5.

DESCRIPTION

Layer 1 link failure.
Data packet collision has occurred.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 161
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

FCH

24DTR

DTI
HUB
FCH

CN2

10AL (10)FLT CA
10 BASE-T straight Cable

PZ-PC19(LANI)

HUB

TO IMX MAT
10 BASE-T straight Cable

10 BASE-T straight Cable

Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 162
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface
1.

General Function
The PZ-PC22 (LANI) circuit card is a single port Ether card that builds up Fusion link or Ether LAN
corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) bus slot in the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus.
This card is mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in the IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

HUB

FCCH

HUB

10BASE-T

10BASE-T
LP#0

LP#1

CPU

CPU

CMP#0

CMP#1

CPU

CPU

LAN

LAN
100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

LAN

LAN

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)
HUB

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

SP#0

SP#1

LAN

LAN

LAN

CPU

CPU

10BASE-T

LAN
10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT
NIC

Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 163
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC22 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-88.

CMP-CPR/LP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V
SW
ON
I

-58.6
CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2
O

IMG3

OFF

5.0
A

5A
125V
AC/DC

PALM

OUTPWR
ON
ALM
INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-PC22
Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-89.

LAN

100M
TXRX
LINK
COL

Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 164
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

100M

Green

100MHz mode

TXRX

Green

Data packet sending/receiving

LINK

Green

Link has been established.

COL

Yellow

Data packet collision has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 165
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

HUB

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI)

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 166
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface
1.

General Function
The PZ-PC23 (LANI) circuit card is a multiple ports Ether card that builds up Fusion link or external Ether
LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. In the IPX-UMG system, one connector is used for
Ethernet, and the other for Fusion link. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect
(PCI) bus slot within the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus or Fusion link.
This card is mounted on the CPR of SP in the IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

HUB

FCCH

HUB

10BASE-T

10BASE-T
LP#0

LP#1

CPU

CPU

CMP#0

CMP#1

CPU

CPU

LAN

LAN
100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

LAN

LAN

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)
HUB

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

SP#0

SP#1

LAN

LAN

LAN

CPU

CPU

10BASE-T

LAN
10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT
NIC

Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 167
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC23 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as shown
in Figure 2-92.

SP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V
SW
ON
I

-58.6
CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2
O

IMG3

OFF

5.0
A

5A
125V
AC/DC

PALM

OUTPWR
ON
ALM
INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-PC23
Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23

3.

Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-93.

Note
LAN0
100M0
LINK0
TXRX0
COL0

Note
LAN1
100M1
LINK1
TXRX1
COL1

Note:

Connect the Ether cable to “LAN0” connector for Processor bus within the IPX-UMG system. When
Fusion network is used, connect the Ether cable to “LAN1” connector to establish Fusion link.
Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card

CHAPTER 2
Page 168
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

100M0/1

Green

100MHz mode

LINK0/1

Green

Link has been established.

TXRX0/1

Green

Data packet sending/receiving

COL0/1

Yellow

Data packet collision has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2
Page 169
Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

HUB(PH-CM103)

FCH

24DTR

DTI
HUB
FCH

CN2

10AL (10)FLT CA
10 BASE-T Straight Cable

PZ-PC19(LANI)
PZ-PC23(LANI)

HUB

Connected to
the MAT
10 BASE-T Straight Cable

10 BASE-T Straight Cable

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI)

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2
Page 170
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3

LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards.
•

General Function
Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card.

•

Mounting Location/Condition
Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there
are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

•

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face
layout.

•

Lamp Indications
Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

•

Switch Settings
Each circuit card’s switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard
setting, etc.

•

External Interface
If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting
slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are
provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector
lead locations and the connecting routes are shown.
In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.

NDA-24296

Chapter 3
Page 171
Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of
a maximum of eight parties.
A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an
answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a
C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal
and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time.
The card adopts “N-1 addition” method for establishing a conference.

Note:

This circuit card is used for following features:
• Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [S-56])
• Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-2])
• Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-121])
• Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)

This diagram shows an example of a “Preset” conference involving Tie Line connections.
INT

SW

INT

PA-CFTB
CH
7

Answer/Release Signal →
TLT

6
NETWORK

5

3
LC

2

Conferee

VPROC

4

PCM INT

TLT

1
0
LC
Conference
Originator

Local I/O Bus
CPU

GT

PCM INT: PCM Interface
VPROC: Voice Processor Block

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 172
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 173
Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2.

OPE
N-OPE
SW2

MB

SW1
SW0
BL7

BL0

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

STATE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL0

Red

BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.

-

OPE

BL7

CHAPTER 3
Page 174
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

MB

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

SW0
12345678

SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

DOWN

×

Circuit card make busy cancel

ON

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 175
Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW 1
12345678

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

×

Fixed in the system

OFF

×

Fixed in the system

ON

×

µ-law PCM encoder

1

MEANING

OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8

SW2
12345678

1
OFF

A-law PCM encoder

ON

Conference connection is set up by PB tel.

OFF

Conference connection is not set up by PB tel.

ON

When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114.

OFF

When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP1141.

2

3

CHAPTER 3
Page 176
Revision 1.0

4

OFF

×

Not used

5

OFF

×

Not used

6

OFF

×

Not used

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

MEANING
CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting

SW2
ON

SW2-7

7

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF

ON

SW2-8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

PAD [dB]
0
3
6
9

8
OFF

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT
NO.

SWITCH
NAME

PIM

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

12345678

SW0

ON

12345678

SW1

ON

12345678

SW2

MB

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 177
Revision 1.0

PA-CK14
Oscillator

PA-CK14
Oscillator
1.

General Function
The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source
clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is
a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (±5 ppm
deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clocksource-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (±0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is
mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE
DSC 0

DSC 1

BWB

BWB

DSC1
SEL

SEL

DSC0
OSC

OSC

PLO

SEL

PLO

SEL

FRONT CABLES

TDSW

MUX0

FRONT CABLES

TDSW

MUX1

MUX2

MUX3

MUX0

MUX1

MUX2

BWB

BWB

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 178
Revision 1.0

MUX3

NDA-24296

LC/TRK

PA-CK14
Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in Port Interface Module number zero (PIM 0). The card mounted in slot
number 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OSC#1

OSC#0

PIM0

Note:

3.

This card occupies two slots.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-4.

CLKOUT 0
CLKOUT 1
MB

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 179
Revision 1.0

PA-CK14
Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

CLKOUT0

Green

Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0.

CLKOUT1

Green

Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.

5.

STATE

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

Make-busy of the circuit card.

MB
OFF

6.

MEANING

×

Normal setting.

External Interface
Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of
PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 180
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator
1.

General Function
This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization
with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital
network. As seen in Figure 3-5, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network
selection.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE
DCS 1

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE
DCS 0

MDF
MDF
34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

BWB

BWB

SEL

SEL
OSC

PLL

OSC

PLO #0

PLO #1

BWB

TDSW00

PLL

BWB

TDSW01

TDSW02

TDSW03

TDSW10

TDSW11

TDSW12

TDSW13

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 181
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface
clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source
automatically in the order of:
1. DCS
2. DIU0
3. DIU1
4. DIU2
5. DIU3
6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
•

32.768 MHz CLK

•

8 KHz FH

•

5 msec × “n” FH

CHAPTER 3
Page 182
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit
card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for
the external hold tone source.

FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM

PLO#1
FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM
TONE ROM
PLO#0
SEL
SEL
TONE ROM

Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW1

SEL
SEL
Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW00

Figure 3-6 Music Source

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 183
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-7.

1 2 3 4

SW8F
ACT

SWAC
SWAB

MB

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MJ
MN
SYNC
ICK
PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)

CHAPTER 3
Page 184
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PLO 1

PLO 0

3.

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
ACT

COLOR
Green
Off

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock
subordinate office
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure

MJ

Red

• 8 KHz output FH failure
• 5 msec × “n” output FH failure
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock
source office
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

MN

Red

• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

Green

Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
Remains off when either of the following has occurred:

SYNC

OFF

• DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.
• DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.
• Drifting failure

ICK

Green

PALM

Red

Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
Remains lit when power is abnormal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 185
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

Circuit card Make-busy.

MB
SW03

SWITCH
NAME

MEANING

DOWN

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1-F

1

Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF

When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes,
the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON

This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and
5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF

This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

ON

A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

SW01
5

7
8

CHAPTER 3
Page 186
Revision 1.0

Clock subordinate office.

OFF

4

6

MEANING

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF

×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

4
SW02
5

6

7

8

SWAC

1
2

1

2

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF

DIU 0 is not used.

ON

DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF

DIU 1 is not used.

ON

DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF

DIU 2 is not used.

ON

DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF

DIU 3 is not used.
×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 0
2 M clock for DIU 0

×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 1
2 M clock for DIU 1

×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 2
2 M clock for DIU 2

×

ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF

2 M clock for DIU 3

ON

External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF

×

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

OFF

×

Not used.

SW8F-1

SW8F-2

Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF

OFF

600 Ω

ON

OFF

8.2 Ω

OFF

ON

47K Ω

SW8F
3

4

SW8F-3

SW8F-4

Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF

OFF

600 Ω

ON

OFF

8.2 Ω

OFF

ON

47K Ω

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 187
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SWA0-1

1

2

3

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

Note:

MEANING

SWA0-2

SWA0-3

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

OFF

Für Elise

ON

OFF

OFF

Maiden’s prayer

Note

OFF

ON

Buzzer

Note

ON

OFF

Chime

Don’t care.

SWAB
4

ON
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

5
6

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this
circuit card.

7
8

CHAPTER 3
Page 188
Revision 1.0

ON
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface
When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1
connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

TSWM

Mounting Module

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

REAR VIEW

TSWM

EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)

EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

FM 1
FM 0
SYN 1B
SYN 0B
DIU 3B
DIU 2B
DIU 1B
DIU 0B
DCS B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E
SYN 1A
SYN 0A
DIU 3A
DIU 2A
DIU 1A
DIU 0A
DCS A

34PH EXCLK
CA-A
MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH EXCLK CA-A

Slot No.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO #1

PLO #0

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 189
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

PBX

MDF

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

PLO #0

DCSA0
DCSB0
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

DCS

DCSA1
PLO #1

DCSB1
DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),
DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 190
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

1 234 56 78

ON

1 234 56 78

ON

SW01

SW02

SW03

SWAC

SW8F

12

1 23 4

ON

ON

1 234 56 78

ON

SWAB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 191
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
1.

General Function
This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With this
circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-10, the
PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

DCS1
(MDF)

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

PLO #1

64K+8K

OSC

34PH EXCLK CA-A

OSC

(BWB)

SEL

SEL

CLK, FH, WFH
ACT, ALM

PLL

PLL
(BWB)

Drv
BWB

TSW 00

Drv
BWB

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System

CHAPTER 3
Page 192
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

(MDF)

PLO 0

ISWM

DCS1

PLO 1
64K+8K

OSC

OSC

(BWB)

SEL

SEL

CLK, FH, WFH
ACT, ALM

PLL

PLL
(BWB)

Drv

Drv

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

HSW00

TSW00

HSW01

~

TSW03

HSW10

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

TSW10

HSW11

~

TSW13

from
LN/LMG DTI

from
LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0
(IMG0/IMG1)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3
(IMG0/IMG1)
/(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

~

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0
(IMG2/IMG3)

TSW
00~03

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LN3/LMG3
(IMG2/IMG3)
/(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LC/TRK

~

LC/TRK

Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 193
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM(IMG1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)



Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

CHAPTER 3
Page 194
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-12.

OPE
MB
MJ
MN
SYNC
ICK

1 2 3 4

SW11

CKPKG
ALM0
ALM1
PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW12

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 195
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock
subordinate office

MJ

Red

• 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (±5
ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

MN

Red

• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC

Green

Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK

Green

Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG
Note

Green

Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0
Note

Red

Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1
Note

Red

Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM

Red

Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

Note:

5.

This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card
is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.
Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB
SW03

CHAPTER 3
Page 196
Revision 1.0

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1-F

1

Fixed to “1”.

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.
[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×
Note 1

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF

×
Note 1

ON
OFF

4
OFF

×
Note 1

OFF

×
Note 1

OFF
7
8
Note:

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

×
Note 1

When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on
outputting the current phase clock.
This circuit card is used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m
Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

ON
6

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON
5

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

ON
SW01

Clock subordinate office.

OFF
2

3

MEANING

×
Note 1

ON

This circuit card is not used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.
A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).

When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source
(DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 197
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

ON

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

ON

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

3

4
OFF

×

5

7
8

CHAPTER 3
Page 198
Revision 1.0

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

ON

6

Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)

OFF

2

SW01

MEANING

OFF

×

When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on
outputting the current phase clock.

ON

×

This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and
5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
(Fixed to “ON”)

OFF

This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

ON

A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

Fixed OFF (Not used).

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

4
SW02
Note 2
5

6

7

8

1
SW10
2
Note 3

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF

DIU 0 is not used.

ON

DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF

DIU 1 is not used.

ON

DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF

DIU 2 is not used.

ON

DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF

DIU 3 is not used.

ON

×

OFF
ON

2 M clock for DIU 0.
×

OFF
ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 1.
2 M clock for DIU 1.

×

OFF
ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

1.5 M clock for DIU 2.
2 M clock for DIU 2.

×

1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF

2 M clock for DIU 3.

ON

External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF

×

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

ON

CLK card is not used.

OFF

CLK card is used.

Note 2: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISWM is used. The DTI

clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 3: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,
• set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.
• set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 199
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

1

SW11-1

Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)

SW11-2

OFF
ON
OFF

2

MEANING

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω

OFF
OFF
ON

SW11
3

SW11-3

4

Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)

SW11-4

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON

SW12-1

SW12-2

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω

1

2

3

SW12-3

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

OFF

Für Elise

ON

OFF

OFF

Maiden’s prayer

Don’t Care

ON

OFF

Buzzer

Don’t Care

OFF

ON

Chime

SW12
ON
4
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

5
6

MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit
card.

7
ON
8
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 200
Revision 1.0

Not used.
×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface
PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•

PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK1

EXCLK0

TSWM

PLO

PLO

TSW

•

LT cable connectors
Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Backplane

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 201
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a
digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)
DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

TSWM

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

FM1
FM0
DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B
DCSB
SYN1B
SYN0B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E
DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A
DCSA
SYN1A
SYN0A

REAR VIEW

MDF
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
•

PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23
EXCLK1

PLO

PLO

CHAPTER 3
Page 202
Revision 1.0

EXCLK0

ISWM

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

LT cable connectors
Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Backplane
EXCLK1

EXCLK0

ISWM

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

•

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a
digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU
leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).

Rear View

ISWM

EXCLK1
(Slot No.13)

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

EXCLK0
(Slot No.09)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

FM1
FM0
DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B
DCSB
SYN1B
SYN0B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E
DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A
DCSA
SYN1A
SYN0A

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 203
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-15 shows an example of a
system with the PLO cards in dual configuration.

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)
ISW/CMG

MDF

PCM Cable(IP)

PLO#1

LT Connector Cable

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #1

DCSA
DCSB

CLK

EXCLK1
ISWM

EXCLK1
PLO#0

LT Connector Cable

DCSB
DCSA

EXCLK0
PCM Cable(IP)
EXCLK0
BASEU

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #0
CLK

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External
High-Stability Oscillator

CHAPTER 3
Page 204
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-16 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes
that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

LN/LMG

LT Connector

MDF
Digital
Interface

ISW/CMG

PLO#0

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

PCM Cable (2P)

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA

to other node

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

POUTB

Installation Cable

CLK
DIU0A0

EXCLK0

DIU0B0

Note 1

DIU1A0
DIU1B0

PLO#1

DIU2A0

EXCLK1

DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0
Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1

Note 2

DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx
leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 205
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

ISWM
CLK00
(Slot No.08)

CLK10
(Slot No.12)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A
EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)

TSWM0

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

PIN
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Note:

LEAD
NAME
FM1
FM0

DIU 3B
DIU 2B
DIU 1B
DIU 0B

PIN
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

To Digital Interface

LEAD
NAME
E
E

DIU 3A
DIU 2A
DIU 1A
DIU 0A

For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CHAPTER 3
Page 206
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

TSWM1

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-18 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital
Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG
system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

IMG
MDF

LT Connector
Digital
Interface

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

PLO#0
EXCLK0

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUT A
POUT B

PCM Cable (2P)

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

to other node

CLK

Installation Cable

DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

PLO#1
EXCLK1

Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.
DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 207
Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

ISW-LN PLO CA-A/
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and
Installation Cable(25 P)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Pin Assignment
PIN LEAD
No. NAME
26
FM1
27
FM0
28
29
30
31
32
33

PIN LEAD
No. NAME
1
E
2
E
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

MDF

MUSIC
SOURCE

Note

Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1
are required on the MDF.

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.
Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

SW01

SW02

1 234 5 67 8

ON

1 234 5 67 8

ON

SW03

12

ON

SW10
ON

SW11

SW12

CHAPTER 3
Page 208
Revision 1.0

1 234

1 234 5 67 8

ON

NDA-24296

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator
1.

General Function
This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization
with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system
can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-20, the PLO can be redundant
regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE
DCS 1

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE
DCS 0

MDF
MDF
34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

BWB

BWB

SEL

SEL
OSC

PLL

OSC

PLO #0

PLO #1

BWB

TDSW00

PLL

BWB

TDSW01

TDSW02

TDSW03

TDSW10

TDSW11

TDSW12

TDSW13

Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 209
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface
clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source
automatically in the order of:
1. DCS
2. DIU0
3. DIU1
4. DIU2
5. DIU3
6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
•

32.768 MHz CLK

•

8 KHz FH

•

5 msec × “n” FH

CHAPTER 3
Page 210
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit
card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for
the external hold tone source.

FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM

PLO#1
FM

SEL
MUSIC ROM
TONE ROM
PLO#0
SEL
SEL
TONE ROM

Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW1

SEL
SEL
Music/Tone

Speech Path Memory
for Music/Tone
TDSW00

Figure 3-21 Music Source

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 211
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-22.

ACT
MB

SW06
SW05
SW04

1 2 3 4

1 2

MJ
MN
SYNC
ICK
PALM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)

CHAPTER 3
Page 212
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PLO 1

PLO 0

TSWM

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
ACT

COLOR
Green
Off

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock
subordinate office.
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure.

MJ

Red

• 8 KHz output FH failure.
• 5 msec × “n” output FH failure.
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card).
• Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock
source office.
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

MN

Red

• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed.
• Drifting failure.
• Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) failure.

Green

Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
Remains off when either of the following has occurred.

SYNC

OFF

• DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.
• DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.
• Drifting failure.

ICK

Green

PALM

Red

Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
Remains lit when power is abnormal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 213
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

Circuit card Make-busy.

MB
SW03

SWITCH
NAME

MEANING

DOWN

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1-F

1

Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

Clock subordinate office.

OFF

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals
(which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON

This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card
and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF

This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)
card.

ON

A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

4
SW01
5

6

7
8

CHAPTER 3
Page 214
Revision 1.0

MEANING

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF

×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

4
SW02
5

6

7

8

SW05

1
2
1

2

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF

DIU 0 is not used.

ON

DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF

DIU 1 is not used.

ON

DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF

DIU 2 is not used.

ON

DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF

DIU 3 is not used.
×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 0
2 M clock for DIU 0

×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 1
2 M clock for DIU 1

×

ON
OFF

1.5 M clock for DIU 2
2 M clock for DIU 2

×

ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF

2 M clock for DIU 3

ON

External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
×

OFF
OFF

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
Not used.

SW8F-1

SW8F-2

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON

SW8F-3

SW8F-4

Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω

SW06
3

4

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON

NDA-24296

Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω

CHAPTER 3
Page 215
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

1

STANDARD
SETTING

SWA0-1

SWA0-2

OFF
ON
Note
Note

2

MEANING

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

SWA0-3

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

MUSIC

Für Elise
Maiden’s prayer
Buzzer
Chime

3
Note:
SW04
4

Don’t care.

ON
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

5
6

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this
circuit card.

7
8

CHAPTER 3
Page 216
Revision 1.0

ON
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

NDA-24296

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

External Interface
When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1
connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

TSWM

Mounting Module

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

REAR VIEW

TSWM

EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)

EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

FM 1
FM 0
SYN 1B
SYN 0B
DIU 3B
DIU 2B
DIU 1B
DIU 0B
DCS B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E
SYN 1A
SYN 0A
DIU 3A
DIU 2A
DIU 1A
DIU 0A
DCS A

34PH EXCLK
CA-A
MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH EXCLK CA-A

Slot No.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO #1

PLO #0

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 217
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

PBX

MDF

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

CCT /DTI
/PRT

POUT A
POUT B

PLO #0

DCSA0
DCSB0
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

DCS

DCSA1
PLO #1

DCSB1
DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),
DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 218
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

123 4 56 78

ON

12 34 567 8

ON

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW05

SW06

12

1 234

1 23 4 56 78

ON

ON

ON

SW04

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 219
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
1.

General Function
This circuit card used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization between
networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing this
circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-25, the PLO can be
redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

DCS1
(MDF)

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

64K+8K

OSC

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #1

OSC

(BWB)

SEL

SEL

CLK, FH, WFH
ACT, ALM

PLL

PLL
(BWB)

Drv
BWB

TSW 00

Drv
BWB

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System

CHAPTER 3
Page 220
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

(MDF)

PLO 0

ISWM

DCS1

PLO 1
64K+8K

OSC

OSC

(BWB)

SEL

SEL

CLK, FH, WFH
ACT, ALM

PLL

PLL

(BWB)

Drv

Drv

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

HSW00

TSW00

HSW01

~

TSW03

HSW11

HSW10

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

TSW10

~

TSW13

from
LN/LMG DTI

from
LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0
(IMG0/IMG1)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3
(IMG0/IMG1)
/(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

~

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0
(IMG2/IMG3)

TSW
00~03

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LN3/LMG3
(IMG2/IMG3)
/(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LC/TRK

~

LC/TRK

Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 221
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM(IMG1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1)



Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

CHAPTER 3
Page 222
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-27:

OPE
MB
MJ
MN
SYNC
ICK

1 2 3 4

SW11

CKPKG
ALM0
ALM1
PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW12

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 223
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock
subordinate office

MJ

Red

• 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock
source office
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

MN

Red

• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

Note:

SYNC

Green

Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK

Green

Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG
Note

Green

Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0
Note

Red

Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1
Note

Red

Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM

Red

Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card
is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.

CHAPTER 3
Page 224
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB
SW03

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1-F

1

Fixed to “1.”

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 225
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.
[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×
Note 2

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF

×
Note 2

ON
OFF

4
OFF

×
Note 2

OFF

×
Note 2

×
Note 2

8

When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on
outputting the current phase clock.
This circuit card is used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16
WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC
card.

6

7

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

ON

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON
5

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

ON

SW01

Clock subordinate office.

OFF
2

3

MEANING

×
Note 2

ON

This circuit card is not used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16
WCS) card.
A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF

×

Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).

Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS

or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.
Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

CHAPTER 3
Page 226
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

Clock source office.

ON

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

ON

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

OFF

Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

ON

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

3

4
OFF

×

5
OFF

×

When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON

×

This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card
and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
(Fixed to “ON” )

6

8

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS
signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the
PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

ON

7

Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)

OFF

2

SW01

MEANING

OFF

This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)
card.

ON

A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

OFF

×

µ-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

OFF

×

Fixed OFF (Not used).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 227
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

3

4
SW02
Note 1
5

6

7

8

1
SW10
2
Note 2

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF

DIU 0 is not used.

ON

DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF

DIU 1 is not used.

ON

DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF

DIU 2 is not used.

ON

DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF

DIU 3 is not used.

ON

×

OFF
ON

2 M clock for DIU 0.
×

OFF
ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 1.
2 M clock for DIU 1.

×

OFF
ON

1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

1.5 M clock for DIU 2.
2 M clock for DIU 2.

×

1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF

2 M clock for DIU 3.

ON

External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF

×

ON
OFF

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
CLK card is not used.

×

CLK card is used.

Note 1: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, DCS clock from the ISWM is used.

The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 2: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,
• set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.
• set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

CHAPTER 3
Page 228
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

SW11-1

SW11-2

OFF
ON
OFF

MEANING

Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω

OFF
OFF
ON

SW11
3

4
1
2
3

SW11-3

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON

SW12-1

SW12-2

OFF
ON
Don’t Care
Don’t Care

SW12

OFF

600 Ω
8.2 Ω
47K Ω
SW12-3

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
4

Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)

SW11-4

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

MUSIC

Für Elise
Maiden’s prayer
Buzzer
Chime

Not used.
×

Not used.

5
6

MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit
card.

7
ON
8
OFF

Not used.
×

Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 229
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1

•

PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK0

EXCLK1

PLO

PLO

TSWM

TSW

•

LT cable connectors
Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Backplane

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 230
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a
digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)
DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low).

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

TSWM

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

FM1
FM0
DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B
DCSB
SYN1B
SYN0B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E
DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A
DCSA
SYN1A
SYN0A

REAR VIEW

MDF
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
•

PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK1

EXCLK0

ISWM

PLO

PLO

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 231
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

LT cable connectors
Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Backplane
EXCLK1

EXCLK0

ISWM

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

•

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a
digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)
DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low).

Rear View

ISWM

EXCLK1
(Slot No.13)

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

EXCLK0
(Slot No.09)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

FM1
FM0
DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B
DCSB
SYN1B
SYN0B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A
DCSA
SYN1A
SYN0A

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 232
Revision 1.0

E
E

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

•

Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-30 shows an example of a
system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration.

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)
ISW/CMG

MDF

PCM Cable(IP)

PLO#1

LT Connector Cable

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #1

DCSA
DCSB

CLK

EXCLK1
ISWM

EXCLK1
PLO#0

LT Connector Cable

DCSB
DCSA

EXCLK0
PCM Cable(IP)
EXCLK0
BASEU

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #0
CLK

Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External
High-Stability Oscillator

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 233
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes
that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

LN/LMG

LT Connector

MDF
Digital
Interface

ISW/CMG

PLO#0

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

PCM Cable (2P)

RA
RB

to other node

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB

Installation Cable

CLK
DIU0A0

EXCLK0

DIU0B0

Note 1

DIU1A0
DIU1B0

PLO#1

DIU2A0

EXCLK1

DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0
Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1

Note 2

DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx
leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

CHAPTER 3
Page 234
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

ISWM
CLK00
(Slot No.08)

CLK10
(Slot No.12)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A
EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)

TSWM0

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

TSWM1

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

PIN
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

LEAD
NAME
FM1
FM0

DIU 3B
DIU 2B
DIU 1B
DIU 0B

PIN
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

To Digital Interface

LEAD
NAME
E
E

DIU 3A
DIU 2A
DIU 1A
DIU 0A

Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.

Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 235
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-33 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital
Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG
system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

IMG
MDF

LT Connector
Digital
Interface

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

PLO#0
EXCLK0

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUT A
POUT B

PCM Cable (2P)

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

to other node

CLK

Installation Cable

DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

PLO#1
EXCLK1

Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.
DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

CHAPTER 3
Page 236
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

ISW-LN PLO CA-A /
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and
Installation Cable(25P)
MDF

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Pin Assignment
PIN LEAD
No. NAME
26
FM1
27
FM0
28
29
30
31
32
33

PIN LEAD
No. NAME
1
E
2
E
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

MUSIC
SOURCE

Note

Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1
are required on the MDF.

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.
Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 237
Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

SW01

12 34 56 78

ON

SW02

12 34 56 78

ON

SW03

12

ON

SW10
ON

SW11

SW12

CHAPTER 3
Page 238
Revision 1.0

12 34

1 234 5 67 8

ON

NDA-24296

PH-CK18
Clock

PH-CK18
Clock
1.

General Function
This circuit card is used for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system or used for the Local Module Group
(LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals to
the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 of
IMG1/5/9/13, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 of
IMG2/6/10/14.
•
•
•

32.768 MHz CLK
8 KHz FH
5 msec × “n” FH (for Wireless System)
DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

(MDF)

PLO 0

ISW

DCS1

PLO 1
64K+8K

OSC

OSC

(BWB)

SEL

SEL

CL K, FH, W F H
A C T, A LM

PLL

PLL

(BWB)

Drv

Drv

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
(BWB)

HSW00

TSW00

HSW10

HSW01

~

TSW03

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH
TSW ACT
(Cable)

TSW10

HSW11

~

TSW13

from
LN/LMG DTI

from
LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0
(IMG0/IMG1)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 0
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

PLO 1
(TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3
(IMG0/IMG1)
/(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT
TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

~

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0
(IMG2/IMG3)

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

CLK0
(TSWM1)

CLK1
(TSWM1)

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

TSW
00~03

TSW
10~13

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

MUX
(System0)

MUX
(System1)

32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LN3/LMG3
(IMG2/IMG3)
/(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFH
PLO ACT

LC/TRK

~

LC/TRK

Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 239
Revision 1.0

PH-CK18
Clock

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM1(IMG2/6/10/14)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in the figure below:

OPE
MB

ALM0
ALM1
PALM

Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)

CHAPTER 3
Page 240
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CLK (#1)

CLK (#0)

3.

PH-CK18
Clock

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:
LAMP

COLOR

OPE

Green

Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

ALM 0

Red

Lights when clock signal failure has occurred.

ALM 1

Red

Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred.

PALM

Red

Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.

5.

MEANING

Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
MB
OFF

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 241
Revision 1.0

PH-CK18
Clock

6.

External Interface

ISWM
CLK10
(Slot No.12)

CLK00
(Slot No.08)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A
EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)

EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

TSWM0

PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

PIN
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

LEAD
NAME

DIU
DIU
DIU
DIU

3B
2B
1B
0B

PIN
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

LEAD
NAME

DIU
DIU
DIU
DIU

3A
2A
1A
0A

Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CHAPTER 3
Page 242
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

TSWM1

PH-CK18
Clock

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 243
Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 8C.O. lines and the
system. And this card also provides the caller ID service. Depending upon keys setting of this card, the first
circuit on this card can be used as an interface for Paging Equipment. In this instance, the second circuit is
also used for the purpose of activating the Paging Equipment. Example of the Paging Equipment and Caller
ID service are illustrated below. In addition, the appropriate value of Terminal Impedance and Balancing
Network (BNW) can be selected by key setting.

This diagram shows an example where this card is used as both a PGT and COTs.
SW

INT

PA-8COTBJ

INT

PGT
"555-1234"

PGT

MDF

circuit 1

Speech Line

circuit 2

Control Line

PAGING
EQUIPMENT

G

Terminal

To Battery

MODEM

ATI

COT

Attendant
Console

COT

circuit 7
circuit 8

PUBLIC
NETWORK

"555-1234"

MODEM
"555-1234"

Local I/O Bus
GT

CPU

Terminal

Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

02 03

CHAPTER 3
Page 244
Revision 1.0

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10 11

12

13

14

15

NDA-24296

16

17

18 19

20

21

22

23

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-39.

OPE
SW00
(MB)
BL4~7

BL0~3

SW01
(MB0-7)

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW05

Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
8COT Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

BL0

Green

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

-

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

BL7
OFF

Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding
circuit is in make busy state.
BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 245
Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

SW00
(MB)

DOWN

Circuit card make busy

×

OFF

Circuit card make busy cancel
Request for make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch.

ON

SW01
(MB0-7)

MEANING

×

Request for cancelling the make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch.
Terminal Impedance and B.N.W.setting
SW0 (SW10)
1

SW02

4

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

1

ON

×

Fixed to ON

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

ON

Paging Trunk is available (When this switch is set to
ON, CH0 and CH1 cannot be used as CO trunks.)

OFF

Paging Trunk is not available.

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

2

ON

×

Fixed to ON

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

SW05

CHAPTER 3
Page 246
Revision 1.0

3

OFF OFF OFF OFF EIA/TIA 464-A 600 Ω+2.16 µ
OFF ON ON OFF CCITT Q.517
900 Ω+2.16 µ
ON ON ON OFF
900 Ω
Other Combinations
Inhibited

1-4

SW03

SW04

2

MEANINGS
Terminal
B.N.W.
Impedance

NDA-24296

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT4

LT5

LT6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT7

LT8

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 247
Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

•

Cable Connections for a C.O. Line

PBX

MDF

Installation Cable

COT

A0

A

B0

B

PUBLIC
NETWORK

LT Connector

•

Cable Connections for Paging Equipment
PBX

Installation Cable

COT

Speech Path

MDF

A0

A

B0

B

B1
A1

G

PAGING EQUIPMENT

LT Connector

G

Control Line

-48V
FUSE

-48V

G

Note:

As illustrated above, two circuits (#0, #1) are required for connecting paging equipment.
Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram
Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance
Balancing Network

Terminal Impedance
1kΩ

350 Ω

600 Ω

EIA/TIA 464-A

2.16µF

0.21µF
600+2.16µ
900 Ω

900Ω
900 Ω
100 Ω

CCITT Q. 517
AT&T Echo Test
Network

CHAPTER 3
Page 248
Revision 1.0

0.05µF

800 Ω

NDA-24296

2.16µF

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SW00
(MB)

REMARKS
UP:
Circuit card make busy.
DOWN: Circuit card make busy
cancel.

OFF

SW01
(MB0-7)

Make Busy switches associated
with No. 0 through No. 7
Circuits.
ON:
Make busy on each
circuit basis.
OFF: Make busy cancel on
each circuit basis.

No.8
No.7
No.6
No.5
No.4
No.3
No.2
No.1

ON

1 234

ON

1 234

ON

1 234

ON

1 234

ON

SW02
PIM

SW03

SW04

SW05

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 249
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk
1.

General Function
This circuit card is accommodated in the PIM and supports the following interface.
(a) Interface with 16 C.O. lines
(b) Interface with 14 C.O. lines and 1 Paging Equipment line.
TSW
COT

C.O. Line
LC

Paging Equipment

Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 250
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

02

03

PIM
04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 251
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-43.

OPE
SW00(MB)
BL15

BL0

SW02(MB8-15)

SW0 SW1

SW01(MB0-7)

Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

OPE

COLOR

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit
is in make busy state.

OFF

BL- lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

~

BL0
BL15

CHAPTER 3
Page 252
Revision 1.0

STATE

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

SW00
(MB)

DOWN
0

1

2

3
SW01
(MB0 ~ 7)
4

5

6

7

Circuit card make busy
×

ON
OFF

×
×
×
×
×
×

No. 5 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 6 Circuit make busy

×

ON
OFF

No. 4 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 5 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 3 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 4 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 2 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 3 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 1 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 2 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 0 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 1 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

Circuit card make busy cancel
No. 0 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

MEANING

No. 6 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 7 Circuit make busy

×

No. 7 Circuit make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 253
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
0

1

2

3
SW02
(MB8 ~ 15)
4

5

6

7

CHAPTER 3
Page 254
Revision 1.0

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
OFF

No. 8 Circuit make busy
×

ON
OFF

×
×
×
×
×

No. 13 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 14 Circuit make busy

×

ON
OFF

No. 12 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 13 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 11 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 12 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 10 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 11 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 9 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 10 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

No. 8 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 9 Circuit make busy

ON
OFF

MEANING

No. 14 Circuit make busy cancel
No. 15 Circuit make busy

×

No. 15 Circuit make busy cancel

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
Terminal Impedance
SW0 (SW10)

1-4

1
OFF
OFF

MEANING

2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Other Combinations

Terminal impedance
600 Ω + 2.16 µF
900 Ω + 2.16 µF
Not used

Wink Signal Detection Time.
SW0 (SW10)
Detection Time
5

SW0
(SW10)

5, 6

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

6

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

56 ms
96 ms
136 ms
176 ms

Answer Signal Detection Time.
SW0 (SW10)
Detection Time
7

7, 8

Note:

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

8

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

56 ms
96 ms
136 ms
176 ms

Switch No.5-8 is only available when SP-3331 is used for E911 service. If SP-3003 is used, these switches
are fixed to off.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 255
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.
1

2

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

OFF
ON
OFF

(Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing
signal does not arrive longer than three seconds.)

ON
3
OFF

SW1
(SW11)

6

7

8

CHAPTER 3
Page 256
Revision 1.0

×

Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if
ringing signal does not arrive longer than six seconds.)

ON

Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a
Paging trunk (No. 1 Circuit cannot be used as a C.O. trunk)

OFF

Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a
C.O. trunk (No. 1 Circuit can be used as a C.O. trunk)

4

5

MEANING

ON
OFF

×

Fixed

ON

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk
PAD Setting
ARTD

APAD

TRANSMIT
(D-A) PAD

RECEIVE
(A-D) PAD

7

15

0dB

0dB

2

2

3dB

3dB

3

3

6dB

6dB

4

4

0dB

-5dB
(Gain)

NDA-24296

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 257
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-44.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 258
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 259
Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

Connection with C.O. Line

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

COT

A0

A

B0

B

C.O. Line

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

Connection with Paging Equipment

MDF

Speech Signal Leads

NEAX2400 IPX

COT

A0

A

B0

B

Paging Equipment

B1 (MR)

G

B0
G
-48V
G
-48V

FUSE

Distibution Board

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 260
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

SW00 (MB)

OFF

SW01
(MB0-7)

REMARKS
UP :
Circuit card make busy
DOWN: Circuit card make busy
cancel

Make Busy Switches associated
with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits.
ON : Make busy on each circuit
basis.
OFF: Make busy cancel on each
circuit basis.

No.7
No.6
No.5
No.4
No.3
No.2
No.1
No.0

ON
OFF

Make Busy Switches associated
with No. 8 through No. 15 Circuits.
ON : Make busy on each circuit
basis.
OFF: Make busy cancel on each
circuit basis.

PIM
No.7
No.6
No.5
No.4
No.3
No.2
No.1
No.0

SW02
(MB8-15)

ON

SW0

SW1

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 261
Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface
1.

General Function
This circuit card is an attendant console (ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function
for accommodating ATTCON (maximum two sets of ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (ATTCON Call Termination Information) link
interface function, etc. The PA-CS02-C card is exclusively for a system which adopts “µ-law” as its encoding law.

: Control Line
: Speech Path
12M PCM Highway

IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

2M PCM Highway

SW

×12

INT
PM Bus ×2

I/O Local Bus

CPU

GATE

ATI

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE (×2)

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS02-C (ATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

ATI

ATI

CHAPTER 3
Page 262
Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47.

SW3
OPE

SW2

N-OPE
SW6

MB

SW7

BLS1
BLS0
BLA1
BLA0

SW8

3
2
1
0

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 263
Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication

LAMP

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

Red

Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in make-busy state or when select signals
are being transmitted.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

BLS0
BLS1
BLA0
BLA1

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

Circuit card make busy

—

×

DOWN
1
SW2-1/
SW3-1
2

SW2 (TAS1)
SW3 (TAS0)
3

4

CHAPTER 3
Page 264
Revision 1.0

MEANING

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Circuit card make busy cancel

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE
SW2-2/
SW2-3/
SW2-4/
RESISTANCE
SW3-2
SW3-3
SW3-4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

NDA-24296

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

0Ω
200 Ω
390 Ω
590 Ω
820 Ω
1020 Ω
1210 Ω
1410 Ω

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

1
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SW6 (TAS1)
SW7 (TAS0)

2
3
4

SW6-1/
SW7-1

SW6-2/
SW7-2

SW6-3/
SW7-3

SW6-4/
SW7-4

TAS
(A WIRE)

TAS
(B WIRE)

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
ON

-48V
CR
G
LOOP

G
G
G
LOOP

ON
0

OFF

No. 0 circuit make-busy request

×

ON
SW8

1

Normal setting
No. 1 circuit make-busy request

OFF

×

Normal setting

2

OFF

×

Not used

3

OFF

×

Not used

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 265
Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-48.

Mounting Module

PIM
< LT Connector on the ATT TERM>
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42 TAS 0B
43
44 TAS 1B
45
46
47
48
49
50

[ATT TERM (PZ-M366)]

RLT

LT

To LT5/LT11

ATT1

ATT0
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

SW1
ON

IC

ON

SW0

LT0
Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT6

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

TAS 1A

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

ATI

ATI

PIM

CHAPTER 3
Page 266
Revision 1.0

LT7

TAS 0A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME
PIM

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

1234
SW2

1234
SW3

1234
SW6
12, 23
1234
SW7

OFF

SW8

No.3
No.2
No.1
No.0
ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 267
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface
1.

General Function
This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface
function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling
of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending
of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination
Information) link interface function, etc.
: Control Line
: Speech Path
I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
TDSW
2M PCM Highway

MUX
PM Bus

CPU

GT

HMATI

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE (×2)

Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS08 (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

HMATI

HMATI

CHAPTER 3
Page 268
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-50.

SW03

SW08

SW02

SW07
OPE
N-OPE
SW04

MB

SW11
FU1 (Note )

FU0 (Note )
BLS1
BLS0
BLA1
BLA0
SW09

3
2
1
0

SW12

Note:

When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.
2
3
 1 MB key → ON Remove
the FU0 and FU1. Extract
this card.
1
2

Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1.
Plug in the FU0 and FU1.
3 MB key → OFF

Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 269
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP

COLOR

OPE

Green

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

BLS0
BLS1

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Blink
Note:

BLA0
BLA1

CHAPTER 3
Page 270
Revision 1.0

Red
Blink

The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

NDA-24296

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy.
Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

DOWN
1

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SW02 (TAS0)
SW03 (TAS1)

2

SWITCH

1
2
3
4

3
4

SW04

1

ON

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

ON

×

Fixed

4

OFF

×

Fixed

TAS (A WIRE)

-48V
CR
G
LOOP

TAS (B WIRE)

G
G
G
LOOP

1
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE
SW7-1/
SW8-1

SW7-2/
SW8-2

SW7-3/
SW8-3

SW7-4/
SW8-4

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

2
SW07 (TAS0)
SW08 (TAS1)
3

RESISTANCE

0Ω
200 Ω
390 Ω
590 Ω
820 Ω
1020 Ω
1210 Ω
1410 Ω

4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 271
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.
1

2
SW11
3

4

1

2
SW12
3

4

0

SW9

Note:

1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON
×

Fixed

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

×

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
ON

×

OFF
ON

×

Fixed (all ON)

OFF
ON

×

OFF
ON
OFF

No. 0 System is in Make-busy request.
×

ON

Normal setting
No. 1 System is in Make-busy request.

OFF

×

Normal setting

2

OFF

×

Not used

3

OFF

×

Not used

When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX
114, b7 = I.

CHAPTER 3
Page 272
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface
The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-51.

Mounting Module

PIM
PIM
LT5, 11 Connector
(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42 TAS 0B0
43 TAS 1B0
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 TAS 0A0
18 TAS 1A0
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT5
LT0
Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT11
LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

23
22
21
20

HMATI

HMATI

PIM

19
18
17
16

Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 273
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

REMARKS
UP: Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1 2 3 4

SW02

1 2 3 4

SW03

ON

SW04

ON

SW07

ON

SW08

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

OFF

SW09

No. 3
No. 2
No. 1
No. 0

SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
ON
(Piano Switch)

ON

SW11

ON

SW12

CHAPTER 3
Page 274
Revision 1.0

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface
1.

General Function
This circuit card is Hotel attendant console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface
function for accommodating Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending
function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON
Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.

: Control Line
: Speech Path
I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
TSW
2M PCM Highway

MUX
PM Bus

I/O Local Bus

CPU

GT

HMATI

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE (×2)

Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 275
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

02

03

PIM
04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23
HMATI

HMATI

CHAPTER 3
Page 276
Revision 1.0

14

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

SW03

SW08

SW02

SW07
OPE
N-OPE
SW04

MB

SW11
FU1 (Note)

FU0 (Note)
BLS1
BLS0
BLA1
BLA0
SW09

3
2
1
0

SW12

Note:

When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.
1
 MB
key → ON 2 Remove the FU0 and FU1. 3 Extract this card.
 1 Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. 2 Plug in the FU0 and FU1.
3 MB key → OFF

Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 277
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP

COLOR

OPE

Green

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy

BLS0
BLS1

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating

Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy
Blink
Note:

BLA0
BLA1

CHAPTER 3
Page 278
Revision 1.0

Red
Blink

The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy
Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

MB

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

Circuit card make busy

UP

Circuit card make busy cancel

DOWN
SW02 (TAS0)
SW03 (TAS1)

1

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

2
3
4
SW04

SW07 (TAS0)
SW08 (TAS1)

1

ON

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

ON

×

Fixed

4

OFF

×

Fixed

1

2

3

SWITCH

TAS (A WIRE)

TAS (B WIRE)

1
2
3
4

-48V
CR
G
LOOP

G
G
G
LOOP

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE
SW7-1/
SW8-1

SW7-2/
SW8-2

SW7-3/
SW8-3

SW7-4/
SW8-4

RESISTANCE

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

0Ω
200 Ω
390 Ω
590 Ω
820 Ω
1020 Ω
1210 Ω
1410 Ω

4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 279
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SW11

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON
1

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

×

Fixed

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

×

OFF
ON

2

OFF
ON

3

OFF
ON

4
SW12
1

OFF
2

ON

×

OFF
3

ON

×

Fixed (all ON)

OFF
4

ON

×

OFF
SW9

ON
0

OFF

No. 0 System is in make-busy request.

×

ON
1

Note:

Normal setting
No. 1 System is in make-busy request.

OFF

×

Normal setting

2

OFF

×

Not used

3

OFF

×

Not used

When PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX
114, b7 = I.

CHAPTER 3
Page 280
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-54.

Mounting Module

PIM

LT5, 11 Connector
(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42 TAS 0B0
43 TAS 1B0
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 TAS 0A0
18 TAS 1A0
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT5
LT0
Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT11
LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

23
22
21
20

HMATI

HMATI

PIM

19
18
17
16

Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 281
Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

REMARKS
UP: Circuit card make busy
DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

1 2 3 4

SW02

1 2 3 4

SW03

ON

SW04

ON

SW07

ON

SW08

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

OFF

SW09

No. 3
No. 2
No. 1
No. 0

SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
ON
(Piano Switch)

ON

SW11

ON

SW12

CHAPTER 3
Page 282
Revision 1.0

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

NDA-24296

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface
1.

General Function
This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two
sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.

MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW
PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW
PM BUS

PCM HW
TSW/INT/PLO
CPR
GT

PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK

ATI

DESK
CONSOLE

Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 283
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI

ATI

Universal Slots

3.

Universal Slots

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-56.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW17
SW14

SW11
SW10

SW13
SW12

SW00
PALM
BLA1
BLA0
BLS1
BLS0

SW15

SW01

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW16

Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)

CHAPTER 3
Page 284
Revision 1.0

OPE

NDA-24296

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

OPE

PALM

BLS0
BLS1

OFF

Off when circuit card is not operating.

Red

Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred.

OFF

Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on
the Desk Console).
Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF

Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns onPA lamp on the
Desk console).

Red

Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.

Flash
(60 IPM)
OFF

5.

Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally.

Flash
(60 IPM)

BLA0
BLA1

STATE

Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted.
Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.

Switch Setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

Circuit card is Make-busy.

SW00

×

DOWN

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

MEANING

Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

MEANING
Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console.

0
OFF
ON
SW01

Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.
×

Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console.

1
OFF

Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.

2

OFF

×

Not used.

3

OFF

×

Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 285
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively.
1

SW10
(TAS#0)

SW10-3/
SW13-3

2

SW13
(TAS#1)

3

4

SW10-2/
SW13-2

SW10-1/
SW13-1

STANDARD
SETTING

RESISTANCE

ON

ON

ON

0Ω

ON

ON

OFF

220 Ω

ON

OFF

ON

398 Ω

ON

OFF

OFF

618 Ω

OFF

ON

ON

800 Ω

OFF

ON

OFF

1020 Ω

OFF

OFF

ON

1198 Ω

OFF

OFF

OFF

×

1418 Ω

This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/15.

SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4
(TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1).
SW11/
SW12
(TAS#0)
SW14/
SW15
(TAS#1)

CHAPTER 3
Page 286
Revision 1.0

SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED
SW12/
SW15

SW11/
SW14

SW10-4/
SW13-4

ON

ON

ON

CR

G

OFF

ON

ON

-48V

G

OFF

OFF

OFF

LOOP

LOOP

OFF

OFF

ON

G

G

NDA-24296

STANDARD
SETTING

×

TAS 0A/
TAS 1A

TAS 0B/
TAS 1B

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

MEANING

For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel application, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.
Desk Console
Key pattern
to be used

SYS 1 INDEX 160
SW16-1

SW16-7
Bit 1

1

2
SW16
3

Hotel type

ON

Business type

OFF

2

OFF

0

1

ON

—

1

OFF

—

0

Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.

SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as shown below.
SW16-4

SW16-3

COUNTRY

ON

ON

OFF

NORTH AMERICA

ON

OFF

ON

AUSTRALIA

Other combinations

ON

Not used

A-law PCM coding.

OFF

1

1

OFF

5

8

1

Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available.

4

7

ON

ON

SW16-5

6

Bit 0

×

µ-law PCM coding.

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF).

Refer to SW16-1.
OFF
ON

Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals.

OFF

×

PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission.

ON

×

Fixed to ON.

Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6.
3

SYS 1 INDEX 6
SW17-3

SW17-4
Bit 6

SW17
4

Note:

5~7

OFF

8
Note

ON
OFF

Bit 5

Bit 4

OFF

OFF

0

0

0

ON

OFF

0

0

1

OFF

ON

0

1

0

ON

ON

1

0

0

×

Fixed to OFF.
Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization.

×

Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.

DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card
initialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 287
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface
Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-57.

Mounting Module

LT5, 11 Connector

PIM

The lead for each ADD
ON
CONSOLE
is
shown below.

Note:

#0 ADD ON
MODULE
A0
B0
BN4800 - 48v
BN4801 - 48v

#1 ADD ON
MODULE
A1
B1
BN4810 - 48v
BN4811 - 48v

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

BN4800
BN4820
BN4810
BN4830
B0
B2
B1
B3

BN4801

Note:

BN4821

The lead for each
DESK CONSOLE is
shown below.

BN4811
BN4831
A0

#0 DESK

A2

A2
B2
BN4820 - 48v

A1
A3

#1 DESK
CONSOLE

CONSOLE

A3
B3
BN4830 - 48v
BN4831 - 48v

BN4821 - 48v

LT5
LT0
Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT11
LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9

LT10

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.

00 02 04 06 08 10

01 03 05 07 09 11

14 18 22
13 17 21

00 02 04 06 08 10

12 16 20

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

CHAPTER 3
Page 288
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20

ATI

ATI

PIM

15 19 23

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

PBX
Installation

MDF

IDF

6-PIN MODULAR
ROSETTE

Cable
ATI

A2

#0 DESK
CONSOLE

A2
B2

B2
BN4820

(-48V)

BN4821

(-48V)

BN4820
BN4821

6-PIN MODULAR
CABLE

GND
GND

#1 DESK
CONSOLE
A3

A3

B3

B3

BN4830

BN4830

BN4831

BN4831
GND
GND

GND
(PZ-M377)

Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram
Note:

The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is
supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 289
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Desk Console.
Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

PAGE
LINE
(8-core) REC (6-core)
(8-core)

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

DESK CONSOLE

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
26
1
27
2

DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console
Modular Jack
Transformer

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

6-core Modular Cable
GND

Surge
Protection

- 48 V
A1
B1

DC/DC
Convertor

GND

GND

–48V/–24V

- 48 V

7
8
9
10
BN4820 11
12
13
BN4810 14
15
BN4830 16
17
B2
18
19
B0
20
21
B1
22
23
B3
24
25
BN4800

BN4801
BN4821

BN4811
BN4831
A0

Add-on for
Console 0

A2

Console 0

A1

Add-on for
Console 1

A3

Console 1

G

Note:

GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)

Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection

Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between
the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.
Source

0.5 φ Cable

0.65 φ Cable

PBX
Local Power Supply

1,148 ft. (350 m)
3,937 ft. (1,200 m)

1,640 ft. (500 m)
4,921 ft. (1,500 m)

CHAPTER 3
Page 290
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

If the distance exceeds the above, estimate it according to the calculation after Figure 3-60.

m
A

B

Installation
Cable

PBX

ATI

MDF

C
6-pin Modular
rosette

IDF

A2

A

B2

B

BN4820 (-48V)

BN4820

BN4821 (-48V)

BN4821

#0 DESK
CONSOLE

6-pin Modular
Cable

GND
GND

#1 DESK
CONSOLE
A3

A

B3

B

BN4830

BN4830

BN4831

BN4831
GND
GND

GND
(PZ-M377)

Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 291
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette
The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power
supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following
formula:
m=a+b+c <
= 26Ω
m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette
a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A
b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B
c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C
Example of Calculation
a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:
Note:

You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae.You may use cable lengths in
feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of
length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.

a=

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables
Cable resistance on GND cables
u (Ω/m) × x (m)
u (Ω/m) × x (m)
+

b=

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables
Cable resistance on GND cables
v (Ω/m) × y (m)
v (Ω/m) × y (m)
+

c=

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables
Cable resistance on GND cables
w (Ω/m) × z (m)
w (Ω/m) × z (m)
+

21
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

22
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

22
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

u: DC resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)
v: DC resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)
w: DC resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)
x: Cable length (m) in the range of A
y: Cable length (m) in the range of B
z: Cable length (m) in the range of C

CHAPTER 3
Page 292
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-61.

Mounting Module

PIM

PIM
LT5, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

TAS1B
TAS0B

TAS1A
TAS0A

LT5
LT0
Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT11

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

23
22
21
20

ATI

ATI

PIM

19
18
17
16

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 293
Revision 1.0

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW00

OFF

SW01
ON

SW10 (TAS #0)

SW13 (TAS #1)

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ON

ON

SW11 (TAS #0)
OFF

ON

SW12 (TAS #0)
OFF

ON

SW14 (TAS #1)
OFF

ON

OFF

ON

SW15 (TAS #1)

SW16

12 34 56 78

ON

SW17

12 34 56 78

ON

CHAPTER 3
Page 294
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-8LCBR circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of eight analog voice terminals and
the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card can send “Stutter Dial
Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp
(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for
each channel. This card can be used for Caller ID service.

SW

INT
C.O. Line

PUBLIC
NETWORK

COT

(PA-8LC BR)
Analog Terminal

•
•
•

LC
max. 1200 [Ω]

Loop Resistance : Max. 1200 [Ω]
(inclusive of terminal resistance)
Reverse Function : x 8 circuits
Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp
(selectable)

Local I/O Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 295
Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 296
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-63.

OPE
SW00
(MB)

SW11

SW13

SW12

BL7
6
5
4

SW15
SW14

3
2
1
0

SW16

SW01
SW10

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

COLOR
Green

STATUS
Steady Lighting

The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED
keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of
the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses
from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps
flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses
coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state.
Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0

~

Green

MEANING

BL7

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 297
Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on this circuit card have the following meanings.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW11

SW12

SW13

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

SW00
(MB)

SW10

SETTING

Circuit card make busy

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

1

ON

×

2

OFF

×

3

OFF

×

4

OFF

×

1

OFF

×

2

OFF

×

1

OFF

×

2

OFF

×

1

OFF

×

2

OFF

×

1

2
1
Note 1

Fixed

Fixed

OFF

Polarity Reverse

ON

Message Waiting Lamp flashes
(1-sec. ON, 1-sec. OFF)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lights or flashes
(Selected and Controlled by software)

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

Stutter Dial Tone is available

OFF

Stutter Dial Tone is not available

ON

Ringer Timer mode: Common mode

OFF

Ringer Timer mode: Separate mode

ON

Pre-ringing is not available

SW16
2
Note 2

Fixed

Momentary Open

2

SW15

Fixed

ON

SW14

1

MEANING

OFF

Pre-ringing is available

Note 1: When Caller ID is in service, set SW16-1 to OFF (Separate mode).
Note 2: Valid when SW16-1 is set to ON (Common mode).

CHAPTER 3
Page 298
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

SWITCH

SW01
(BNW0 - 7)

SETTING
Balancing Network
Designation
• Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.

ON

OFF

BNW: Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464A)
For long distance

12 34 5 678
ON

BNW: 600 Ω
For short distance

OFF

Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.

BNW2 (ON)
350Ω

BNW1 (OFF)

1000Ω
600Ω
0.21

µ

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 299
Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown
Figure 3-64.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT4

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

3

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

CHAPTER 3
Page 300
Revision 1.0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

3

1

HW7

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

A0

L1

B0

L2

LC
Rosette

Telephone

Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 301
Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW00
(MB)

ON

12 34

SW10

SW01
(BNW 0 - 7)

12 34 567 8

1 2

ON

SW11

Fixed

1 2

PIM

ON

SW12

Fixed

1 2

ON

SW13

Fixed

1 2

ON

1 2

ON

1 2

ON

SW14

SW15

SW16

CHAPTER 3
Page 302
Revision 1.0

ON

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
This circuit card provides the interface for 16 station lines. This circuit card is provided with functions for
supervising each user's call origination, call answering, release, detection of switch hook flashing, relaying
of DP/PB signals, transmission of ringing signals to the called side, and bothway transmissions of voice
band signals. For use of this circuit card, there are the following limitations.
(a) There are four kinds of balancing network, each of which is set up according to the line conditions
involved.
(b) PAD is only for receiving side 5 dB (at the time of station to station call).

TSW
COT
C.O. Line

16LC

(MAX. 16 Stations)

Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 303
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
•

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 304
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.

OPE
MB
BL15
SW1

BL0

BNW8-15

SW0

BNW0-7

Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is opening.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) to dial pulses at the time of an outgoing call or when the corresponding
circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

~

BL0
BL1S

STATE

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 305
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

Circuit card make busy.

DOWN

×

Circuit card make busy cancel.

1

OFF

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

OFF

×

Fixed

4

OFF

×

Fixed

SW0

CHAPTER 3
Page 306
Revision 1.0

MEANING

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1

OFF

Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

ON
2

OFF

OFF

×

BNW0 ~ 7

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

ON
8

Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
7

Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
6

Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
5

Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
4

Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
3

MEANING

Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For short distance.
Note:

Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.
However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting referring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN
THE LINE RESISTANCE

NDA-24296

BALANCING
NETWORK

LINE
RESISTANCE

SWITCH

Short Distance
Long Distance

0 ~ 100 Ω
More than 100 Ω

OFF
ON

CHAPTER 3
Page 307
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1

OFF

Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

ON
2

OFF

OFF

×

BNW8 ~ 15

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

ON
8

Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
7

Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
6

Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
5

Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
4

Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For long distance.

ON
3

MEANING

Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For short distance.
Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For long distance.

×

Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For short distance.
Note:

Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.
However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting
referring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN
THE LINE RESISTANCE

CHAPTER 3
Page 308
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

BALANCING
NETWORK

LINE
RESISTANCE

SWITCH

Short Distance
Long Distance

0 ~ 100 Ω
More than 100 Ω

OFF
ON

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

Polarity Reversal as Disconnect Signal

1
2

MEANING

OFF

×

Momentary Open as Disconnect Signal

OFF

×

Fixed

SW1-3

SW1-4

INTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN
0.4/0.2/0.4-ON/OFF/ON
• Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.4

3
OFF
(standard)

OFF
(standard)

0.4

2.0

0.2

• Rering
0.4

0.8

0.2

0.4

4.0

0.2

0.2/0.2/0.2/0.2-ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON
• Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.2 0.2 0.2

OFF

ON

2.0

0.2 0.2

• Rering

SW1

0.2 0.2

0.4

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.2

4.0

0.2 0.2

0.35/0.3/0.35-ON/OFF/ON
• Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.35

4

ON

2.0

0.35

0.3

OFF
• Rering

0.35

0.7

0.3

4.0

0.35

0.3

0.2/0.4/0.2-ON/OFF/ON
• Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.2 0.2

ON

ON

2.2

0.4

• Rering
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.4

NDA-24296

0.2

4.2

0.2 0.4

CHAPTER 3
Page 309
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

5

6
SW1

SW1-5

SW1-6

OFF
OFF

OFF
ON

ON

OFF

ON
7

OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 310
Revision 1.0

OFF

In the case of lighting (normal setting)
In the case of 60 IPM flashing
In the case of lighting or flashing
(As controlled by the software)

Stutter Dial Tone Available

×

ON
8

SWITCH SETTING FOR MW
LAMP CONTROLLING

Stutter Dial Tone Not Available
Pre-signaling is not performed.

×

Pre-signaling is performed.

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-68 below.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 311
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 312
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

NDA-24296

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

LC

A0

L1

B0

L2
Rosette

Ordinary Telephone

Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 313
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

SW0

REMARKS

12 3 4

SW1

ON

1 23 456 78

BNW0-7

ON

1 23 456 78

BNW8-15

ON

1 23 456 78

PIM

MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 314
Revision 1.0

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel.

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-16LCBJ-A circuit card,which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface between
a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance.This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal
which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

SW

INT
C.O. Line

PUBLIC
NETWORK

COT

(PA-16LC BJ-A)
Analog Terminal

•
•
•
•

LC
max. 600 [Ω]

Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω]
(inclusive of terminal resistance)
Reverse Function : x 1 circuits
Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp
(selectable)
Encoding Law : µ-law.

Local I/O Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 315
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 316
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-71.

SW13
OPE
SW00 (MB)
BL12-15
BL8-11

BL4-7

BL0-3

SW12

SW11 SW10
(BNW8-15) (BNW0-7)

Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 317
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

STATUS
Steady Lighting

The circuitry of the circuit card is operating
normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED
keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of
the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial
pulses from a line are being received, Busy
LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the
dial pulses coming from the line.
3)Line is in make-busy state.
Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0

~
BL15

CHAPTER 3
Page 318
Revision 1.0

Green

MEANING

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

UP

SW00
(MB)

Circuit card make busy.

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel.
CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK

ON
1

OFF

Compromise

×

No. 0

×

No. 1

×

No. 2

×

No. 3

×

No. 4

×

No. 5

×

No. 6

×

No. 7

ON
2

OFF

Compromise

ON
3

OFF

4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
8

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
7

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
6

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
5

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
SW10
(BNW0~7)

600 Ω

600 Ω
Compromise

NDA-24296

600 Ω

CHAPTER 3
Page 319
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK

ON
1

OFF

Compromise

×

No. 8

×

No. 9

×

No. 10

×

No. 11

×

No. 12

×

No. 13

×

No. 14

×

No. 15

ON
2

OFF

Compromise

ON
3

OFF

SW11
(BNW8~15)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

1
SW12
2

SW13

CHAPTER 3
Page 320
Revision 1.0

OFF

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
8

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
7

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
6

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
5

600 Ω
Compromise

ON
4

600 Ω

600 Ω
Compromise
600 Ω

ON

Immediate is not available.

OFF

Immediate is available.

ON

Stutter dial tone is available

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp is available

ON

Momentary Open

OFF

Polarity Reverse

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-72.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 321
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 322
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

NDA-24296

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

LC

A0

L1

B0

L2
Rosette

Ordinary Telephone

Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 323
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

SW00
(MB)

PIM

ON

UP : Circuit card make busy

SW10
(BNW 0 - 7)

0 123 45 67

ON

SW11
(BNW 8 - 15)

0 123 45 67

ON

12

SW12

ON

OFF

ON

(RVS)

(OPEN)

SW13

CHAPTER 3
Page 324
Revision 1.0

REMARKS

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-16LCBJ-B circuit card, which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface between
a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (0hm) inclusive of terminal
resistance.
This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which
has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

SW

INT
C.O. Line

PUBLIC
NETWORK

COT

(PA-16LC BJ-B)
Analog Terminal

•
•
•
•

LC
max. 600 [Ω]

Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω]
(inclusive of terminal resistance)
Reverse Function : x 1 circuit
Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp
Encoding Law : µ-law

Local I/O Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 325
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 326
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-75.

SW16

OPE
MB
BL15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

SW15
SW13

SW10

SW11

Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

STATE
Steady Lighting

The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial
pulses coming from the line.
3)Line is in make-busy state.
Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0

~
BL15

Green

MEANING

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 327
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LC BJ-B card have the following meanings.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW00(MB)

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING
Card make-busy
(Inserted state)

UP

Card make-busy cancel
(Operating state)

DOWN
1
SW13
ON

12 34

SW15
ON

2

OFF

×

ON

Stutter dial tone is available
×

Stutter dial tone is not available

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF
Message waiting lamp flashes
(1-sec. ON/1-sec. OFF)

ON
3

4

OFF

×

Message waiting lamp lights or flashes
(controlled by software)

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

ON
OFF

OFF
(RVS)

Momentary open
×

ON
(OPEN)

CHAPTER 3
Page 328
Revision 1.0

Fixed to OFF

OFF

12 34

SW16

MEANING

NDA-24296

Polarity reverse

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SETTING
ON

12 34 567 8

Balancing Network
Designation
• Each element
corresponds to
circuits 0 - 7.

OFF
ON

BNW: Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464A)
for long distance

▼

SW-10
(BNW0 - 7)

▼

BNW: 600 Ω
for short distance

OFF
ON

12 34 567 8

Balancing Network
Designation
• Each element
corresponds to
circuits 8 - 15.

OFF
ON

BNW: Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464A)
for long distance

▼

SW-11
(BNW8 - 15)

▼

BNW: 600 Ω
for short distance

OFF

Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.

ON
350Ω

OFF
1000Ω
600Ω
0.21 µ

compromise impedance (EIA/TIA-464A)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 329
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-76.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 330
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 331
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

A0

L1

B0

L2

LC
Rosette

Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 332
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Telephone

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW00
(MB)

SW13

SW15

12 34

ON

12 34

ON

PIM
OFF

ON

(RVS)

(OPEN)

SW16

SW10
(BNW0-7)

0 12 3 45 67

ON

SW11
(BNW8-15)

01 23 456 7

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 333
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and
the system with a range of 1200 inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial
Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp
(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition momentary open/reverse battery function is
provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.

INT
C. O. line

PUBLIC
NETWORK

SW

COT

(PA-16LCBW)
LC

Analog Terminal
max. 1200 [Ω]

• Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of
terminal Resistance)
• Open Function: x 15 circuits
• Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable)
• Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)
• Encoding Law: µ-law

I/O Local Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 334
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

3.

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-79.

OPE
SW00 (MB)
SW18

BL15

BL0

SW17

SW16 SW15

SW14

SW10

SW11

Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 335
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

-

BL0
BL15

CHAPTER 3
Page 336
Revision 1.0

LAMP
COLOR

LAMP STATUS

Green

Steady Lighting

The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.

Green
Flashing

MEANING OF INDICATION

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in
synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are
being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with
the dial pulses coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state.
Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.
SWITCH

FUNCTION

SW00
(MB)

Balancing
Network
Designation
ON
OFF

Note:

MEANING

ON

Circuit card make-busy

OFF

Circuit card make-busy cancel
(Normal operating mode)

ON

North America, Other Country (µ Law)
BNW : Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464B)
(Note)
for long distance.

Circuit Card
Make-busy Key

SW10
(BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING

• Each element on
this switch
OFF
corresponds to
circuit #0-#7.

North America, Other Country (µ Law)
BNW : 600 Ω
(Note)
for short distance

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 Ω.
(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))
ON

350

OFF

1000
600

0.21µ

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 337
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

SWITCH
No.

SWITCH
SW11
(BNW8-15)

OFF

SW14
1 2 3 4

ON
OFF

SW15
1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3
Page 338
Revision 1.0

MEANING

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

ON

Fixed to ON

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF

Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

2
OFF

SWITCH
SETTING

Balancing Network
Designation
• Each element on this (This same as previous page)
switch corresponds to
circuit #8-#15.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

SWITCH

No.

SW16

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Message Waiting Lamp
Flashing
(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or
Flashing (Selected and
Controlled by Software)

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Momentary open

OFF

Polarity reverse

1 2 3 4

ON
OFF

SW17
1 2 3 4

ON

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

OFF

3

Message Waiting
Lamp

4
SW18

ON
OFF
(RVS)
(OPEN)
Slide switch

Polarity reverse or
Momentary Open
(circuit #15 Only )

NDA-24296

MEANING

CHAPTER 3
Page 339
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-80.

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

1

2

HW0

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

LT9 LT10 LT11

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-81).

CHAPTER 3
Page 340
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 341
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.
MDF
PBX
Installation Cable
LC

A

L1

B

L2
Jack

LT Connector

Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 342
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Analog Terminal

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

PIM
SW00
(MB)

ON

SW10
(BNW0-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW11
(BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

ON

OFF

SW18
(RVS)

(OPEN)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 343
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and
the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter
Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp
(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition polarity reverse function is provided for 16
channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.

Note:

The PA-16LCBY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

TSW/INT

C. O. LINE

PUBLIC
NETWORK

COT

(PA-8RSTY)

(PA-16LCBY)

RST

LC

Analog Terminal

max. 1200 [Ω]

• Loop Resistance : Max 1200[Ω]
(inclusive of terminal resistance)
• Reverse Function : x 16 circuits
• Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)
• Encoding Law : µ-law

Local I/O Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3
Page 344
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-83.

OPE
SW00
(MB)
BL15

SW19
BL0
SW17
SW16
SW15
SW14

SW10
(BNW0-7)

SW11
(BNW8-15)

Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 345
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

LAMP
COLOR

LAMP STATUS

OPE

Green

Steady Lighting

The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing
in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are
being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with
the dial pulses coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state.
Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0
~

Green

BL15

5.

MEANING OF INDICATION

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH

FUNCTION

SW00
(MB)

Balancing
Network
Designation

ON
OFF

OFF

Circuit card make-busy cancel

ON

Circuit card make-busy

ON

North America, Other Country (µ Law)
BNW : Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464B)
(Note )
for long distance

OFF

North America, Other Country (µ Law)
(Note )
BNW : 600 Ω
for short distance

• Each element on
this switch
corresponds to
circuit #0-#7.
When this switch
has been set, see
SW14.

CHAPTER 3
Page 346
Revision 1.0

MEANING

Circuit Card
Make-busy Key

SW10
(BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

SWITCH

No.

SW11
(BNW8-15)

OFF

SW14
1 2 3 4

ON
OFF

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

ON

Fixed to ON

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

NEAX 2400 PAD
PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB

OFF

ICS-PBX PAD
PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB

ON

Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF

Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

North America
Brazil
China
Other Country

ON
OFF

MEANING

1

SW15
1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING

Balancing Network
Designation
• Each element on this [the same as previous page]
switch corresponds
to circuit #8-#15.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

1
PAD (Australia Only)

2

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 347
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

SWITCH

No.

SW16

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Message Waiting Lamp
Flashing
(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or
Flashing (Selected and
Controlled by Software)

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

3

ON

Fixed to ON

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1 2 3 4

ON
OFF

SW17
1 2 3 4

ON

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

OFF

3

SW19
1 2 3 4

ON
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 348
Revision 1.0

Message Waiting
Lamp

NDA-24296

MEANING

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit
Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω.
(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))
ON

350

OFF

1000
600

0.21µ

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 349
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-84.

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

1

2

HW0

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

LT9 LT10 LT11

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 350
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 351
Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.
MDF
PBX
Installation Cable
LC

A

L1

B

L2
Jack

LT Connector

Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 352
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Analog Terminal

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

PIM
SW00
(MB)

ON

Note:

SW10
(BNW0-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW11
(BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW19

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

NDA-24296

Normal operating mode is down.

CHAPTER 3
Page 353
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current
1.

General Function
The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the D term and the IPX. Depending on the
switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.
•

16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications
only)

•

8 DLC mode:

A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice
and data communications)
8 DLC MODE

16 ELC MODE
IPX
IMX

D

term

DTE

#0

DTE
term

term

IMX
IPX
#0

Data Adapter ELC

ELC

D

D

D

term

#7

#15

Data Adapter

Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System

There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for D term Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ
PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the D term performance depending
on each firmware EPROM.
Table 3-3 Performance
Dterm SERIES E

FIRMWARE
•
SP-3295
16ELC J
PROG-B

SP-3270
16ELC J
PROG-A

CHAPTER 3
Page 354
Revision 1.0

Dterm SERIES III

24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

• Month and year (last two digits) also displayed following
the time and date.
• Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed
by office data.
•

16 digits wide of LCD.

•

Month and year are not displayed.

• Software keys are available. However, key function is
fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).

NDA-24296

•

16 digits wide of LCD.

•

Month and year are not displayed.

•

Software key is not available.

•

16 digits wide of LCD.

•

Month and year are not displayed.

•

Software key is not available.

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-87.

OPE
SW00 (MB)
PALM
BL15

BL0

SW01

Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 355
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

PALM

COLOR
Green

Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF

Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

Red

Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF

Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been
assigned.

OFF

Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL0
BL15

Note:

STATE

When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.
i)

Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the
PA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on.
ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.
iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.
iv) Connect the Dterm again.

CHAPTER 3
Page 356
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.

SWITCH

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.

SW00 (MB)
Circuit Card Makebusy key

Circuit card Make-busy.
ON

12345678

1

See Table 3-4 below.
OFF

SW01

-

12345678

-

2
6
8

ON

12345678

—

Always ON (fixed).
OFF
12345678

ON

16ELC mode.
7

ELC/DLC
mode
Designation

OFF
12345678

ON

8DLC mode.
OFF

Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7

SW01-7

ON

OFF

SW01-1
ON

OFF

•

16 sets of Dterms per card.

•

8 sets of Dterms per card.

•

Voice Communication only.

•

Data Adapter is used.

•

16 sets of

Dterms

per card.

•

8 sets of Dterms per card.

•

Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the
same time.

•

Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and
Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 357
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

6.

External Interface
Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT
connectors as follows.
•

6ELC mode

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

1

2

1

2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

1

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

1

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 358
Revision 1.0

LT9 LT10 LT11

NDA-24296

2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

•

16ELC mode

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

3

3

19
18
17
16

3

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

3

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 359
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SW00
(MB)
PIM
SW01

CHAPTER 3
Page 360
Revision 1.0

12345678

NDA-24296

ON

REMARKS

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between D term and IPX. Depending upon the
switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.
• 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications
only)
• 8 DLC mode:

A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice
and data communications)
8 DLC MODE

16 ELC MODE
IPX
D

term

DTE

#0

DTE
term

term

IPX
#0

Data Adapter

ELC

D

D

D

term

ELC

#7

#15

Data Adapter

Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System
Table 3-5 Performance
Dterm SERIES E

Dterm SERIES III

• 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

• 16 digits wide of LCD.

• Month and year is displayed following the time and date.

• Month and year are not displayed.

• Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the
system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data.

• Software key is not available.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 361
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module
00

3.

01

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-90.

OPE
SW00 (MB)
PALM
BL15

BL0
SW10

SW11

Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card

CHAPTER 3
Page 362
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

23

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

PALM

COLOR
Green

Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF

Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

Red

Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF

Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been
assigned.

OFF

Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL0
BL15

Note:

STATE

When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.
i)

Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit to all lines belonging to the
PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on.
ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.
iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.
iv) Connect the Dterm again.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 363
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.

SWITCH

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

SW00 (MB)

MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit Card Makebusy key
Circuit Card Make-busy.
SW10

ON

12345678

OFF

1

LP-PM
Interface
mode setting

ON

12345678

OFF

2

—

When firmware SP-3419 is used, and your
system uses software Series 7300 Release 7 or
earlier.
Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is
not available.
When firmware SP-3514 is used, and your
system uses software Series 7400 Release 8 or
later.
Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is
available.

ON

12345678

Not used.
OFF
ON

12345678

This circuit card is operated in 16 ELC mode.
OFF

Details
are shown
in the next
table.

3-4

ELC/DLC
mode setting

ON

12345678

This circuit card is operated in 8 DLC mode.
OFF

Do not set another combination.
ON

12345678

Analog Port Adapter is available.
5

Analog Port
Adapter
setting

OFF
ON

12345678

Analog Port Adapter is not available.
OFF
ON

12345678

6-8

—

Fixed to “OFF”.
OFF

SW11

ON

12345678

1-8

—

Fixed to all “OFF”.
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 364
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF
SW10-5: OFF

s per card.

•

16 set of D

•

Voice Communication only.

•
SW10-5: ON

term

16 set of D

term

s per card.

• Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or
Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

NDA-24296

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON
•

8 set of Dterms per card.

•

Data Adapter is used.

•

8 set of Dterms per card.

• Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and
Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

CHAPTER 3
Page 365
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT
connectors as follows.
•

16ELC mode

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

2

1

HW7

2

HW8

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 366
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 367
Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

•

8DLC mode

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

LT4

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

3

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

3

1

HW7

Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)

CHAPTER 3
Page 368
Revision 1.0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SW00
(MB)

PIM

SW10

SW11

REMARKS

12345678

ON

12345678

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 369
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler
1.

General Function
This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The FusionLink-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once
the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to
the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel
(or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.

RJ-45
ETHER NET
CONT
CPU
HDLC
CONT

BWB
LP-PM
INT

FRONT CABLE
D/I
CONT

DTI
CONT

Note

FCH

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE

DTI

HUB
(PA-M96)

CPU

LANI
(PZ-PC19)

CPR

Note:

This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.
Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 370
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

2.

Mounting Location/ Condition
The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.

Mounting Module

PIM
PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-94.

OPE
MB
LYR
LB
LOAD

SW14
SW13

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

EST3
EST2
EST1
EST0
PWALM

MNT
10-BASE-T
MODE

SW12
SW11
SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DTI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 371
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Green

Remains lit while the Fusion link is established.

Flash

Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM)

OFF

Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test
result is not fair.

LYR

Green

STATE

Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use.

LB
OFF

Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready.

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.
(Forwarding Status)

Flash
(60 IPM)

Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.
(Blocking Status)

Flash
(120 IPM)

Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.
(Learning Status)

OFF

Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.
(Null Status)

LOAD

EST3

Green

Remains lit while sending data.

EST2

Green

Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal.

EST1

Green

Remains lit while receiving data.

EST0

Green

Remains lit while the link is established.

PWALM

Red

CHAPTER 3
Page 372
Revision 1.0

Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

5.

Switch setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

Note:

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB
Note

MNT

SETTING

DESCRIPTION
Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN

×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

0

OFF

×

Not used.

1

OFF

×

Not used.

2

OFF

×

Not used.

3
Note

ON

Make-busy-request.

OFF

×

Cancel the Make-busy-request.

The following operations are required prior to extracting the card.
(1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch.
(2.) Flip the MB switch.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

0-7

DESCRIPTION
Not used.

×

8

Standard setting.
(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

MODE
Fusion link test mode.
(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

9
A-F

Not used.

When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.
STANDARD
SETTING

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW10

1
Note

OFF

×

T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds.

2~8

OFF

×

Not used.

Note:

SETTING
ON

DESCRIPTION
T203 timer value is variable.

T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the
shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 373
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

DESCRIPTION

ON
1
OFF
ON

This SW designates the D/I channel of the
Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

2
OFF
ON

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for
denial.

3

SW11
Note 1

OFF

SW11

ON

SW11-1

CH 0

OFF

SW11-2

CH 1

SW11-3

CH2

SW11-4

CH 3

4
ON
5
OFF

SW11-5

CH 4

ON

SW11-6

CH 5

OFF

SW11-7

CH 6

SW11-8

CH 7

6
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 374
Revision 1.0

D/I channel of T1

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING
ON

1
OFF
ON
2

STANDARD
SETTING

DESCRIPTION
This SW designates the D/I channel of the
Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)
Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for
denial.

OFF
ON
3
OFF

SW12

ON

SW12-1

CH 8

OFF

SW12-2

CH 9

ON

SW12-3

CH 10

OFF

SW12-4

CH 11

ON

SW12-5

CH 12

OFF

SW12-6

CH 13

ON

SW12-7

CH 14

OFF

SW12-8

CH 15

4
SW12
Note 1

D/I channel of T1

5

6

7
ON
8
OFF

Note 1: When “n” is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.

When “n” is one or more, the corresponding D channels as “n” must be designated by SW11-SW12.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 375
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

DESCRIPTION

This SW designates the D/I channel of the
Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

1
OFF
ON

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for
denial.

2
OFF
ON
3
OFF

SW13

ON
4
OFF
SW13
ON
5

D/I channel of T1

SW13-1

CH 16

SW13-2

CH 17

SW13-3

CH 18

SW13-4

CH 19

SW13-5

CH 20

SW13-6

CH 21

SW13-7

CH 22

SW13-8

CH 23

OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF
ON

×

Positive logic for the D/I CONT

1
OFF
ON

Negative logic for the D/I CONT
×

The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.

2
Note 2

SW14-2

OFF
SW14
ON

×

3
Note 2
OFF

4
Note 3

CHAPTER 3
Page 376
Revision 1.0

SW14-3

SPEED

ON

ON

64 Kbps × n

ON

OFF

56 Kbps × n

OFF

ON

48 Kbps × n

OFF

OFF

Not used

ON

Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link
performs as the “network.”

OFF

LAPD signal link performs as the “user.”

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler
Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.

Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing.
Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code
Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).
Note 3: When a node is set “network,” the distant node over the fusion link should be set “user,” and vice versa.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 377
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

6.

External Interface
The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown below.

FCH

24DTR

DTI

FCH

CN2

10AL (10) FLT CA

10 BASE-T
straight cable

HUB

Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection

CHAPTER 3
Page 378
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

See Figure 3-96 when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade connection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection.
One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH
card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5)
FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card.
As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection.
(a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card)
(b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)
(c) DCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)
Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. (Note)

Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH

24DTR

CN2

FCH

FCH

Note

FCH

DTI

DTI

DTI

FCH

FCH

FCH

To the next
FCH/CCH/DCH

To HUB

Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection
Note:

A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1’ 7.6 ”).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 379
Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

OFF

MNT
ON

MODE

SW10

8

12 34 567 8

ON

1 23 4 56 78

ON

12 34 56 78

ON

1 234 56 78

ON

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

CHAPTER 3
Page 380
Revision 1.0

1 2 3 4

ON

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the
system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial
Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp
(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

INT

SW

C. O. LINE

PUBLIC
NETWORK

COT

(PA-24LCBV)
LC

Analog Terminal

max. 600 [Ω]

• Loop Resistance : Max 600[Ω]
(inclusive of terminal resistance)
• Reverse Function : x 1 circuit
• Stutter Dial Tone
• Message Waiting Lamp
• Encoding Law : µ-law

I/O Local Bus
CPU

GT

Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 381
Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-98.

OPE2
OPE1
SW00 (MB)

SW18

BL23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

SW11
(BNW8-15)

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

SW10
(BNW0-7)

BL23

BL0

CN
SW13
SW12
(BNW16-23)

SW15

SW14

SW17

SW16

Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this card are shown below.

LED NAME

COLOR

LED STATUS

DESCRIPTION

OPE1

Green

Steady Lighting

The circuitry of circuit #0-#7 is operating normally.

OPE2

Green

Steady Lighting

The circuitry of circuit #8-#23 is operating normally.

Steady Lighting

Line loop exists.
1. Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in
synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

~

BL0
BL23

Green

Flashing

2. Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are
being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the
dial pulses coming from the line.
3. Line is in Make-busy state.
4. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

CHAPTER 3
Page 382
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-24LCBV (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING
ON

SW00
(MB)

OFF

Balancing Network
Designation

SW10
(BNW0-7)
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

Circuit Card
Make-busy Key

ON

•

SWITCH

ON

ON

Circuit card Make-busy

ON

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)
BNW: Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464A)
(Note 1)
for long distance.

Each element on
this switch
corresponds to
OFF
circuit #0-#7.

OFF

No.

FUNCTION

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)
BNW : 600 Ω
(Note 1)
for short distance

SWITCH SETTING

•

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

Each element
on this switch
corresponds to
circuit #8-#15.

The same as previous table.

Balancing Network
Designation

SW12
(BMW16-23)

•

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

Each element
on this switch
corresponds to
circuit #16-#23.

SW13
ON

Selection of the User

The same as previous table.

SW13 SW13 SW13 SW13
-1
-2
-3
-4
ON

OFF

1
SW14
1 2 3 4

MEANING

Balancing Network
Designation

SW11
(BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4

MEANING

Stutter
Dial Tone

OFF

OFF

North America

OFF

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Stutter Dial tone Available

OFF

Stutter Dial tone not Available

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 383
Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

SWITCH

No.

SW15

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

Message Waiting Lamp
Flashing
(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or
Flashing (Selected and Controlled
by Software)

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

Fixed to OFF

5

OFF

Fixed to OFF

6

OFF

Fixed to OFF

7

OFF

Fixed to OFF

8

OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON

1 2 3 4

OFF

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

SW16
ON

1 2 3 4

3
OFF

SW17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
OFF

SWITCH

No.

Message Waiting
Lamp

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

SW18

ON
OFF
(RVS)
(OPEN)
Slide switch

MEANING

MEANING

ON

Momentary open

OFF

Polarity reverse

Polarity reverse or
Momentary Open

Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are as follows.
ON

350

OFF

1000
600

0.21

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
CHAPTER 3
Page 384
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW00
(MB)

Note:

SW10
(BNW0-7)

12 34 56 78

ON

SW11
(BNW8-15)

12 34 56 78

ON

SW12
(BNW16-23)

12 34 56 78

ON

Normal operating mode is down.

ON

SW13

12 34

PIM
ON

SW14

12 34

ON

SW15

12 34

ON

SW16

SW17

12 34

12 34 56 78

ON

ON

OFF

SW18
(RVS)

(OPEN)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 385
Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

7.

External Interface
Location of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-99.
(a) PIM
When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.

Accommodated in 1
LT 4, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LT Connector

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

Accommodated in 2
LT 5, 11 Connector

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23

LT1

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

1

PIM

HW0

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

LT9 LT10 LT11

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

HW6

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 386
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

LT 4, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LT Connector

B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

Accommodated in 3
LT 5, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

PIM

Highway Block

B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 387
Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

(b) LC Connector Leads
LC Connector (1)
CONN1

PKG1

Champ Connector
LT

1A

A0

1B

B0

26

B0

1

A0

2A

A1

2B

B1

27

B1

2

A1

3A

A2

3B

4A

A3

4B

B2

28

B2

3

A2

B3

29

B3

4

A3

5A

A4

5B

B4

30

B4

5

A4

6A

A5

6B

B5

31

B5

6

A5

7A

A6

7B

B6

32

B6

7

A6

8A

A7

8B

B7

33

B7

8

A7

34

B0

9

A0

35

B1

10

A1

36

B2

11

A2

LC CABLE

LC Connector (2)
CONN2

PKG2

1A

A0

1B

B0

37

B3

12

A3

2A

A1

2B

B1

38

B4

13

A4

3A

A2

3B

B2

39

B5

14

A5

4A

A3

4B

B3

40

B6

15

A6

5A

A4

5B

B4

41

B7

16

A7

6A

A5

6B

B5

42

B0

17

A0

7A

A6

7B

B6

43

B1

18

A1

8A

A7

8B

B7

44

B2

19

A2

45

B3

20

A3

46

B4

21

A4

47

B5

22

A5

48

B6

23

A6

49

B7

24

A7

LC Connector (3)
CONN3
1A

PKG3

A0

1B

B0

2A

A1

2B

B1

3A

A2

3B

B2

4A

A3

4B

B3

5A

A4

5B

B4

6A

A5

6B

B5

7A

A6

7B

B6

8A

A7

8B

B7

50

Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable)

CHAPTER 3
Page 388
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

25

PKG1

PKG2

PKG3

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

8.

Connecting Route Diagram
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows.
A and B leads for channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector located on the front edge of the card.

LT Connector
PBX

MDF

Installation
Cable
A8

L1

B8

L2

PA-24LCBV

A23

L1

B23

L2

Jack

Analog
Terminal

Jack

Analog
Terminal

Maximum 600 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Maximum 600 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
Installation Cable
A0

L1

B0

L2
Jack

Analog
Terminal

Jack

Analog
Terminal

LT Connector
LC Cable

A7

L1

B7

L2

Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 389
Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

9.

LC Cable Connection

3m (9.8 feet)

Earth Cable

Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 390
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV

LC Cable
LC Cable

LC Cable

Earth Plate

NT

Earth Cable

FRO

R

LT Cable

REA

Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 391
Revision 1.0

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer
1.

General Function
This circuit card executes a C.O. line to the telephone or the release of a C.O. line due to a power supply
failure, system down, software order, etc. This circuit card is also provided with the change circuit of 12
circuits.

NCU

MDF

MDF

LC

TSW

COT

MDF

MDF

TEL
TEL
(AO, BO)

LC
(AI, BI)

TRK
(TI, RI)

(NITE KEY)
ATTCON

Position within the System

Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 392
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CO
(TO, RO)

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-M69

PA-M69
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 393
Revision 1.0

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

3.

Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamp, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105.

OPE
MB

NCU1

SW0
NCU0

Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU)

4.

Lamp Indication
The contents of lamp indication of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

CHAPTER 3
Page 394
Revision 1.0

STATE
Remains lit even when PFT is being activated on any one of the 12 circuits.

NDA-24296

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH
NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

SW0

SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

DOWN

×

Circuit card make busy cancel

1

ON

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

OFF

×

Fixed

4

OFF

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 395
Revision 1.0

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card, accommodation of the NCU connector on
the front side of the circuit card, and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-106.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 6 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

KY1
KY3
KY5
KY7

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

1

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

1

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

CHAPTER 3
Page 396
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

KY0
KY2
KY4
KY6

NDA-24296

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

NCU Connector Accommodation

Station
C.O. Line
Station
C.O. Line
Station
C.O. Line
Station
C.O. Line
Station
C.O. Line
Station
C.O. Line

TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

CHAMP Connector

CHAMP Connector

NCU0

NCU1

BO00
BI00
TO00
TI00
BO01
BI01
TO01
TI01
BO02
BI02
TO02
TI02
BO03
BI03
TO03
TI03
BO04
BI04
TO04
TI04
BO05
BI05
TO05
TI05

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

AO00
AI00
RO00
RI00
AO01
AI01
RO01
RI01
AO02
AI02
RO02
RI02
AO03
AI03
RO03
RI03
AO04
AI04
RO04
RI04
AO05
AI05
RO05
RI05

Station
No. 0
C.O. Line
Station
No. 1
C.O. Line
Station
No. 2
C.O. Line
Station
No. 3
C.O. Line
Station
No. 4
C.O. Line
Station
No. 5
C.O. Line

TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK
TEL
LC
CO
TRK

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

BO06
BI06
TO06
TI06
BO07
BI07
TO07
TI07
BO08
BI08
TO08
TI08
BO09
BI09
TO09
TI09
BO10
BI10
TO10
TI10
BO11
BI11
TO11
TI11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

AO06
AI06
RO06
RI06
AO07
AI07
RO07
RI07
AO08
AI08
RO08
RI08
AO09
AI09
RO09
RI09
AO10
AI10
RO10
RI10
AO11
AI11
RO11
RI11

No. 6

No. 7

No. 8

No. 9

No. 10

No. 11

Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 397
Revision 1.0

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer

Front Connector NCU
MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

PFT

KY0

KY0

KY7

KY7

External
Key Box

A

LC

B

A

COT

B

AO00
BO00
AI00
BI00

A
B

RO00
TO00
RI00
TI00

A
B

Station

C.O. Line

Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

PIM

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

ON

SW0

MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 398
Revision 1.0

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

12 3 4

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

PA-M96
HUB

PA-M96
HUB
1.

General Function
This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the
10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card.
As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI)
and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.

TO/FROM
THE OTHER FUSION

DTI

NODE

FCH

10BASE-T cross cable is used
HUB
for cascade connection
(PA-M96)
CPU

LANI
(PZ-PC19)

CPR #0

CPU

LANI
(PZ-PC19)

CPR #1
HUB
(PA-M96)

10BASE-T straight cable

FCH

TO/FROM
THE OTHER FUSION

DTI

NODE

Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration.
Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 399
Revision 1.0

PA-M96
HUB

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM0

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-110.

OPE
MB
ST7

CRS7

ST0

CRS0
SENS

x TP7-X
x TP6-X
x TP5-X
x TP4-X
x TP3-X
x TP2-X
x TP1-X
x TP0-X
Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card

CHAPTER 3
Page 400
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M96
HUB

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

CRS0~CRS7

Green

Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port.
The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as
shown in the table below.
SEL SWITCH

ST0~ST7

MEANINGS

0

Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is
reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1

2

Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X
port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light
regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7)

3

Lights when the TPn-X port is normal.
Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port.
(n = 0~7) Note 2

Green

Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally

regardless of the cable polarity.
Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048 bit-

times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the
collision is over.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 401
Revision 1.0

PA-M96
HUB

5.

Switch Setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB
DOWN

SENSE

Circuit card Make-busy.
×

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

0

Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7).

1

Not used.

2
3
4-F

CHAPTER 3
Page 402
Revision 1.0

DESCRIPTION

×

TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7).
Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports
(n = 0~7).
Not used.

NDA-24296

PA-M96
HUB

6.

External Interface

FCH

24DTR

DTI
HUB
FCH

CN2

10AL (10) FLT CA
10 BASE-T straight Cable

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

10 BASE-T straight Cable
Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 403
Revision 1.0

PA-M96
HUB

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

SEL

CHAPTER 3
Page 404
Revision 1.0

2

NDA-24296

PA-M103
HUB

PA-M103
HUB
1.

General Function
This circuit card is a class II HUB card based on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX),
which is located between 100M Ether card (PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) and FCCH card that establishes Fusion
link to the system.
This circuit card provides the repeater function, and 12 ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are accommodated
on one HUB card. The state of each port is indicated on the LED.
This card is used in IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

HUB

FCCH

HUB

10BASE-T

10BASE-T
LP#0

LP#1

CPU

CPU

CMP#0

CMP#1

CPU

CPU

LAN

LAN
100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

LAN

LAN

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)
HUB

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX
(P-BUS)

SP#0

SP#1

LAN

LAN

LAN

CPU

CPU

10BASE-T

LAN
10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT
NIC

Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 405
Revision 1.0

PA-M103
HUB

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-M103 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM as shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Note:

3.

Universal Slots

Related to the length of Ether cable, it is recommended that this card ought to be mounted on the PIM
within IMG0/4/8/12 (LPR accommodated IMGs).
Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-113.

TXRX
L3
LA
L9
L8
L7
L6

OPE
PWALM
L5
L4
L3 L2
L1
L0
TPB
TPA
TP9
TP8
TP7
TP6
TP5
TP4
TP3
TP2
TP1
TP0

Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card

CHAPTER 3
Page 406
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M103
HUB

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

PWALM

Red

L0-L9, LA, LB

Green

Link has been established

TXRX

Green

Data packet sending/receiving

5.

DESCRIPTION
Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation
Lights when the OBP (On Board Power) output voltage blownout

Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 407
Revision 1.0

PA-M103
HUB

6.

External Interface

HUB
(PA-M103)

PZ-PC22(LANI)

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 3
Page 408
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk
1.

General Function
This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card which transmits and sends selective signals (DP
signals, PB signals, MF signals).

LC

Station

ATI

COT

C.O. Line

RST

TLT

Tie Line

ATT

TSW

Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 409
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00

05

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 410
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-116.

OPE
N-OPE
MB
~

BLS7
BLS4

~

MBS7
MBS4
~

BLR7
BLR4

~

MBR7
MBR4
~

BLS3
BLS0

~

MBS3
MBS0
BLR3
~

SW1

BLR0

SW0

~

MBR3
MBR0

Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

~

BLR0
BLR7

~

BLS0
BLS7

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 411
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy.

×

ON
0

OFF

MBR0~3

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

5

OFF

×

CHAPTER 3
Page 412
Revision 1.0

OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

ON
6

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
MBR4~7

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
4

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
3

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
2

Circuit card make busy cancel.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
1

MEANING

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

NDA-24296

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

MBR4~7

7

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
OFF

Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

ON
0

OFF

MBS0~3

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

MBS4~7

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

ON
7

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
6

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
5

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
4

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
3

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
2

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
1

MEANING

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

NDA-24296

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

CHAPTER 3
Page 413
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
SW0-1
SW0-2
SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

1
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
SW0

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

-21.7 dBm0
-23.7 dBm0
-25.7 dBm0
-27.7 dBm0
-28.7 dBm0
-31.7 dBm0
-33.7 dBm0
-35.7 dBm0

ON
SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE
SW0-4
SW0-5
SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

4
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 414
Revision 1.0

MEANING

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

-21 dBm0
-23 dBm0
-25 dBm0
-27 dBm0
-28 dBm0
-31 dBm0
-33 dBm0
-35 dBm0

7

OFF

×

Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).

8

ON

×

Fixed.

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

MFR Receive Specification; AT&T

OFF

MFR Receive Specification; CCITT No. 5

ON

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut
Down Protect Timer)
SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)

OFF

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut
Down Protect Timer)
LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

2

3
SW1
4

5

6

MEANING

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of MFR.

OFF

Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of PBR.

ON

Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of MFR.

OFF

Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of PBR.

ON

×

OFF

DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.
DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.

7

OFF

×

No setting (Fixed to OFF)

8

OFF

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 415
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON
3
2
1
0

MBR0-3

ON
3
2
1
0

MBR4-7

ON
3
2
1
0

MBS0-3
PIM

ON
3
2
1
0

MBS4-7

SW0

SW1

MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 416
Revision 1.0

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk
1.

General Function
This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals).

LC

Station

ATI

COT

C.O. Line

RST

TLT

Tie Line

ATT

TSW

Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 417
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

3.

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.

SW10

SW11
OPE
MB
~

BLS7
BLS4

~

MBS7

SW04

MBS4
~

BLR7
BLR4

~

MBR7
SW03

MBR4
~

BLS3
BLS0

~

MBS3

SW02

MBS0
~

BLR3
BLR0

~

MBR3
MBR0

Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST)

CHAPTER 3
Page 418
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SW01

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

BLR0

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

~

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLR7

~

BLS0
BLS7

5.

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

DOWN
0

1
MBR0~3
(SW01)
2

3

4
MBR4~7
(SW03)

SETTING

5

6

Circuit card Make-busy.
×

ON
OFF

×
×
×
×
×

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

MEANING

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

NDA-24296

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

CHAPTER 3
Page 419
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

MBR4~7
(SW03)

7

0

1
MBS0~3
(SW02)
2

3

4

5
MBS4~7
(SW04)
6

7

CHAPTER 3
Page 420
Revision 1.0

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
×

ON
OFF

×
×
×
×
×
×

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

ON
OFF

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

ON
OFF

MEANING

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

×

NDA-24296

Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

×

MEANING

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

1
OFF
ON

×

2
OFF
ON
3
OFF

×

SW10-1

SW10-2

SW10-3

PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON

ON

ON

-21 dBm0

OFF

ON

ON

-23 dBm0

ON

OFF

ON

-25 dBm0

OFF

OFF

ON

-27 dBm0

ON

ON

OFF

-29 dBm0 (standard setting)

OFF

ON

OFF

-31 dBm0

ON

OFF

OFF

-33 dBm0

OFF

OFF

OFF

-35 dBm0

ON
SW10

4
OFF

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

×

ON
5
OFF

×

ON

×

6
OFF

SW10-4

SW10-5

SW10-6

MFR THRESHOLD
VALUE

ON

ON

ON

-17 dBm0

OFF

ON

ON

-19 dBm0

ON

OFF

ON

-21 dBm0

OFF

OFF

ON

-23 dBm0 (standard setting)

ON

ON

OFF

-25 dBm0

OFF

ON

OFF

-27 dBm0

ON

OFF

OFF

-29 dBm0

OFF

OFF

OFF

-31 dBm0

7

OFF

×

Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).

8

ON

×

Fixed.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 421
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH NO.

1

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

MFR Receive Specification; AT&T

OFF

MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5

ON

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut
Down Protect Timer)
SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)

OFF

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut
Down Protect Timer)
LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

2

3
SW11
4

5

6

CHAPTER 3
Page 422
Revision 1.0

MEANING

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR.

OFF

Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR.

ON

Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR.

OFF

Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR.

ON

×

OFF

DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.
DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.

7

OFF

×

No setting (Fixed to OFF)

8

OFF

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MBR0-3
(SW01)

3
2
1
0

ON

MBR4-7
(SW03)

3
2
1
0

ON

MBS0-3
(SW02)

3
2
1
0

PIM

ON

MBS4-7
(SW04)

3
2
1
0

SW10

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW11

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

MB

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 423
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this
card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions
and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending
digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has “Register Sender” function, by which interdigit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without
intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.

Note:

The PA-8RSTY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

This figure shows “Register Sender” function as an example.
PA-8RSTY

INT

TSW

INT
PB line

PBR

OGT

NETWORK
PB Signal

PBS
OFF HOOK
(LC for Calling
Number Delivery)
DP Signal
LC

DPR
DPS

DP Telephone
Caller ID signals
I/O Local Bus
CPU

GT

PBR: Push Button Receiver
PBS: PB Signal Sender
DPR: Dial Pulse Register
DPS: Dial Pulse Sender

Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 424
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

3.

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-120.

Note:

Layout of Lamps and switches differ from other RST cards.
00 01 02 03 04
PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-M565
(ISAGTA)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PZ-M565
(ISAGTA)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PZ-ME44
(MEM)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PZ-ME44
(MEM)

PZ-PC22
(LANI)

PH-PC43 (EMA)

PH-M22 (MMC)

CMP

FANU

DUMMY

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

TSW13 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW12 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW11 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW10 (PU-SW00-A)

PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

TSW03 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW02 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW01 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04
PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-PC19
(LANI)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-PC19
(LANI)

PZ-PC23
(LANI)

PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)

PH-PC43 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

PH-DK10 (DSPC)

SP

Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 425
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BLR0
BLR7

-

BLS0
BLS7

CHAPTER 3
Page 426
Revision 1.0

STATE

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash

Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITC
SETTING
H NO.

MB
(SW00)
SW01
(MBR0-7)

UP
DOWN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SW02
(MBS0-7)

STANDARD
SETTING

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Circuit card make busy

×

ON
OFF

×
×
×

×
×
×

×
×
×

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

×

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

×

ON
OFF

×

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

×

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

×

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

×

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

×

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

Circuit card make busy cancel
Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

ON
OFF

MEANING

Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 427
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH

FUNCTION

SW10

SWITCH SETTING

DTMF Signal Receiver
Threshold Value
[Standard Setting]

1234

1234

1

ON

-

OFF

3

OFF

4
SW11

MFR Signal Receiver
Threshold Value

1234

SW10- SW10- SW10DTMF Threshold Value
1
2
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

[Standard Setting]

1

ON

-

OFF

3

4

Selection of PBR Threshold Value

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

-21.0 dBm0
-23.0 dBm0
-25.0 dBm0
-27.0 dBm0
-29.0 dBm0
-31.0 dBm0
-33.0 dBm0
-35.0 dBm0

Fixed to OFF

1234

CHAPTER 3
Page 428
Revision 1.0

MEANING

OFF

Selection of MFR Threshold Value
SW11- SW11- SW111
2
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Fixed to OFF

NDA-24296

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

MFR Threshold Value
-17.0 dBm0
-19.0 dBm0
-21.0 dBm0
-23.0 dBm0
-25.0 dBm0
-27.0 dBm0
-29.0 dBm0
-31.0 dBm0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH

FUNCTION
Designation of MFR
Specification
1

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING

1234

•
1234

•
DTMF Signal
Cut-off Guard Timer
2

1234

•

ITU-T No. 5 specification

SHORT (less than 10 ms)

LONG (less than 20 ms)

1234

SW12

AT & T specification

•

1234

[Standard Setting]
Register Selection
(MFR/PBR)
3

1234

•
1234

•
Register Selection
(MFR/PBR)
4

1234

•
1234

•

NDA-24296

REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.

REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.

REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.

REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.

CHAPTER 3
Page 429
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
SETTING
NO.

SW13

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

MF Transmission Level:-9dBm

OFF

MF Transmission Level:-5dBm

1

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

CHAPTER 3
Page 430
Revision 1.0

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

1

ON

×

Fixed to ON

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

1

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

2

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

PIM
ON

SW00
(MB)

REMARKS
Circuit card make busy cancel
Standard Setting : Down

ON
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SW01
(MBR0-7)

ON
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SW02
(MBS0-7)

ON

1234

SW10
ON

1234

SW11

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 431
Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

PIM

1234

SW12
ON

1234

SW13
ON

1234

SW14
ON

1234

SW15
ON

1234

SW16
ON

1234

SW17

CHAPTER 3
Page 432
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

REMARKS

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.
This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the
PA-SDTB card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A

Node-B
Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

FCH

S
D
T
B

Connection Link (Data Link)
+
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

FCH

S
D
T
B
SDTA

For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

Internal LAN

Fusion Link without FCCH
Fusion
Node-A

Node-B
Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

S
D
T
B

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

S
D
T
B
SDTA

For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
* ) SDT:
FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler
Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 433
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this
card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Mounting conditions are shown below.
•

Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•

This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables.
•

For single configuration:

SDT CABLEB 

•

For dual configuration:

SDT CABLEA 

•

Fiber optic cables are connected to this card.

•

Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and
TSW.

CHAPTER 3
Page 434
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system
In Figure 3-122, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is
not actually mounted.

PIM3
(Not actually
mounted)

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

PIM2
(Not actually
mounted)

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

PIM0

MUX1A
MUX0B
MUX
MUX1B

MUX3
MUX2
MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

MUX0A

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PIM1

PCM

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

PCM

PH-PC30 (MUX)

I/O

PH-SW10 (TSW)

I/O

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

Example:

MUX3
MUX2
MUX1

LPM

Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 435
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-123.

OPE
ACT
MB
PALM
OPT
SYNC
LPB

P-SW

I/O

PCM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW11 SW12

SC

Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)

CHAPTER 3
Page 436
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally.

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

PALM

Red

Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal.

OPT

Red

Lights when the optical input signals are cut off.

SYNC

Red

Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock comes off synchronization.

LPB

Green

Lights when Loop-back is designated.

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

OPE

ACT

Off

Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 437
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

.
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

1

OFF

×

Fixed

2

ON

×

Fixed

3

ON

×

Fixed

4

OFF

×

Fixed

5

OFF

×

Not used

6

1-8
1
2
3
4

CHAPTER 3
Page 438
Revision 1.0

Circuit card Make-busy
×

8

P-SW

MEANING

DOWN

7

SW12

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

SW11

SETTING

ON
OFF

PAD function is effective.
×

ON

PAD function is not effective.
Setting of A-law

OFF

×

Setting of µ-law

ON

×

OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0)

OFF
OFF

OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1)
×

ON
OFF

Not used
Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back)

×

ON

Designation of OLLPB cancel
Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back)

OFF

×

Designation of ORLPB cancel.

OFF

×

Not used

ON
OFF

Make-busy request
×

Make-busy request cancel

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

6.

External Interface

•

Cable Connection

PA-SDTA

PA-SDTB

Fiber optic cable
SDT CABLEB 
Note1

Note 1: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used.
Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 439
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•

When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system
As shown in Figure 3-125, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/
PIM3 is not actually mounted.

PIM3
(Not actually
mounted)

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

PIM2
(Not actually
mounted)

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

Note
MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX1A
MUX0B
MUX
MUX1B

MUX3
MUX2
MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

MUX0A

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PIM0

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

PIM1

PCM

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PCM

PH-PC30 (MUX)

I/O

PH-SW10 (TSW)

I/O

MUX3
MUX2
MUX1

LPM

Note:

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.
Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System

CHAPTER 3
Page 440
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system
(a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable
When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW
CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depending on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).
Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

PIM3

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

34PH MT24 TSW CA-J

PIM2

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

PIM1

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

PIM0

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 441
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot
Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined
by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.
Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot
MODULE
GROUP
Assigned for
SDT

TIME SLOTS
Assigned for
SDT
PIM2 of IMG0

MG01
PIM3 of IMG0
PIM2 of IMG1
MG03
PIM3 of IMG1
PIM2 of IMG2
MG05
PIM3 of IMG2
PIM2 of IMG3
MG07
PIM3 of IMG3

CABLE CONNECTIONS
FROM
(Connectors on
PA-SDTB)
MUX0A

TO
(Connectors on
BWB of TSWM)
MUX002

MUX1A

MUX102

MUX0B

MUX003

MUX1B

MUX103

MUX0A

MUX012

MUX1A

MUX112

MUX0B

MUX013

MUX1B

MUX113

MUX0A

MUX022

MUX1A

MUX122

MUX0B

MUX023

MUX1B

MUX123

MUX0A

MUX032

MUX1A

MUX132

MUX0B

MUX033

MUX1B

MUX133

REMARKS

In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG0 are not actually
mounted; However, AUNT
data for PIM2/PIM3 is
required.
In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG1 are not actually
mounted; However, AUNT
data for PIM2/PIM3 is
required.
In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG2 are not actually
mounted; However, AUNT
data for PIM2/PIM3 is
required.
In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG3 are not actually
mounted; However, AUNT
data for PIM2/PIM3 is
required.

Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration.
Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the

remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3
Page 442
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example:

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and
PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown
in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship
to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be
mounted in any PIM.

PA-SDTB

PIM3

MUX0A
MUX1A
MUX0B
MUX1B

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 0

PIM 0

PIM 0

PIM 0

LPM

TSWM

Dummy

Dummy

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

Time slots assigned
for SDT (MG07).
PIM2 and PIM3 of
IMG3 are not actually
mounted.

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
(Refer to Table 3-3.)

To MUX133
To MUX033
To MUX132
To MUX032

BWB of TSWM
Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT.
(Refer to Table 3-8 and Figure 3-133.)

Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 443
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

MUX113

MUX103

MUX033

MUX023

MUX013

MUX003

MUX122

MUX112

MUX102

MUX032

MUX022

MUX012

MUX002

MUX132

MUX123

MUX133

Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

CHAPTER 3
Page 444
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

(c) Length of Fiber Optic Cable

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3128 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.

0.00

-5.00

Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm
-10.00

: Best Case
: Worst Case
: Maximum Receiver Sensitivity
: Minimum Receiver Sensitivity

-15.00

-20.00

-25.00

-30.00

Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm
-35.00
0.00

2.00
1.20

4.00
2.40

6.00
3.70

8.00
4.40

10.00
6.20

12.00 14.00
7.40
8.60

16.00 18.00
9.90 11.00

20.00 (km)
12.00 (miles)

Cable Length
Figure 3-128 Level Diagram

Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is as shown in the following table.
Table 3-8 Level Margin

Note:

CONDITION

LEVEL MARGIN

Worst case

4.0 dB

Best case

11.0 dB

Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 445
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•

Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-129.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 POUT B
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 POUT A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
POUT B 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Accommodated in 3
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46 POUT B
47
48
49
50

POUT A

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 POUT A
22
23
24
25

Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.
LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

CHAPTER 3
Page 446
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

NDA-24296

3

1

HW7

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

SW11

SW12

1 234 5 67 8

ON

1 234 5 67 8

ON

ON
1 234

P-SW

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 447
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.
This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the
PA-SDTA card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A

Node-B
Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

FCH

S
D
T
B

Connection Link (Data Link)
+
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

FCH

S
D
T
B
SDTA

For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

Internal LAN

Fusion Link without FCCH
Fusion
Node-A

Node-B
Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

S
D
T
B

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable

SDTA

S
D
T
B
SDTA

For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
* ) SDT:
FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler
Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System
CHAPTER 3
Page 448
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Mounting conditions are shown below.
•

Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•

This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables.
•

For single configuration:

SDT CABLEB 

•

For dual configuration:

SDT CABLEA 

•

This card is connected to the TSW card.

•

Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and
TSW.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 449
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in the figure in Figure 3-131.

OPE
MB
2MALA
2MALB
32MALA
32MALB
ACT0
ACT1
SYC0A
SYC1A
SYC0B
SYC1B

PCM
I/O
MUX0A
MUX1A
MUX0B
MUX1B

Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)

CHAPTER 3
Page 450
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME

COLOR
Green

STATE
Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation.

OPE
Red

Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation.

2MALA

Red

Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal.

2MALB

Red

Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALA

Red

Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALB

Red

Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal.

Green

Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally.

ACT0
Off
Green

Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state.
Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally.

ACT1
Off
Green

Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state.
Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

SYC0A
Off
Green

Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

SYC1A
Off
Green

Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

SYC0B
Off
Green

Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

SYC1B
Off
Note:

Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT2/3.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 451
Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

SWITCH
NAME

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING
UP

Circuit card Make-busy

MB

×

DOWN

6.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

External Interface
Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 452
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler
1.

General Function
Equipped with two circuits of Common Channel Handlers (CCHs), the PA-2CCH A circuit card provides
two signaling links for a digital/analog Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system, which can
be selected by key settings on this card. If a digital CCIS system, this card is connected to a Digital Trunk
Interface (DTI) card with a flat cable to exchange common channel signals as illustrated below. To support
an analog CCIS system, this card also has an RS-232c interface for Modem(s).

Digital CCIS

Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

CCH
INT

SW

INT

Flat Cable
2-wire
DTI

CCIS
NETWORK

Clock Extraction
(For a PLO-SECONDARY switch)

I/O Local Bus

CPU

2-wire

System Clock

PLO

Analog CCIS (with MODEM)
Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

CCH
INT

SW

INT
MODEM

Analog Tie Line
CLK

TLT

CCIS
NETWORK

I/O Local Bus

: Common Channel Signaling Link

CPU

: Speech Path (PCM Signal)
: Clock Signal

Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 453
Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. The DTI and CCH
card, however, cannot coexist in the same Highway Block.

Mounting Module

PIM

The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in the following universal slots shown below. Note that this
card cannot be mounted in slot 04.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note

Note:

When this card is mounted in slot No.4, the LENS data for the first circuit of the CCH card must be assigned
as “000 000”, which is rejected by the ATRK command.

CHAPTER 3
Page 454
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-133.

SW14
OPE
SW13

N-OPE
MB
DOPE0
DOPE1

SW12
SW10

SW11

SW01

SW02

TRK
To "CN2" connector
on CCT/DTI
DCH/CCH
To "TRK" connector
on other DCH/CCH

Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

COLOR
Green

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

DOPE0
DOPE1

Red

Lights when the common channel signalling link is set up.

Flash

Flashes when CCH is started up.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 455
Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

MB

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

Circuit card make busy

×

OFF
SW01

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel

ON

No. 0 Circuit make busy request

0

×

OFF

No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel

ON

No. 1 Circuit make busy request

1
OFF

×

No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel

2

OFF

×

Not used

3

OFF

×

Not used

SW02

ON

Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

0

×

OFF

Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

ON

Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

1

×

OFF

Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

ON

Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF

Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

ON

Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF

Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

2

3
SW10
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.0 CIRCUIT

1
SW10-1

2

3

CHAPTER 3
Page 456
Revision 1.0

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

SW10-2

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

SW10-3

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

NDA-24296

TRANSFER SPEED

64
32
16
8
64
32
16
8

kbps
kbps (Forward)
kbps (Forward)
kbps (Forward)
kbps
kbps (Backward)
kbps (Backward)
kbps (Backward)

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit

OFF

Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit

4

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.1 CIRCUIT

5

SW10

6

7

SW10-5

SW10-6

SW10-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TRANSFER SPEED

64
32
16
8
64
32
16
8

kbps
kbps (Forward)
kbps (Forward)
kbps (Forward)
kbps
kbps (Backward)
kbps (Backward)
kbps (Backward)

ON

Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.

OFF

Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.

8
SW11
(MODE0)

0

×

Standard setting

SW12
(MODE1)

0

×

Standard setting

Note:

When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.
When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 457
Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

SWITCH
NAME
SW13
(for No. 0
Circuit)

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT

1
SW13-1/
SW14-1

SW14
(for No. 1
Circuit)

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

2

3

4

5

SW13-2/
SW14-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

SW13-3/
SW14-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

SW13-4/
SW14-4

SW13-5/
SW14-5

TIME SLOT NO.
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON

Mode setting; No. 7 PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)

OFF

Mode setting; No. 7 CCIS

6

SETTING OF SPEED OF MODE

7

8

CHAPTER 3
Page 458
Revision 1.0

SW13-7/
SW14-7

SW13-8/
SW14-8

SPEED

OFF

OFF

2400 bps

OFF

ON

4800 bps

ON

OFF

9600 bps

ON

ON

NDA-24296

Inhibit

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

6.

External Interface
In analog CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on LT connectors as follows.
See also Connecting Route Diagram for Digital/Analog CCIS.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

26
SG 0
27
RT 0
28
RS 0
29
30
SG 1
31
32
RT 1
33
RS 1
34 SCKB 0
35 TDB 0
36 RDB 0
37
38 SCKB 1
39 TDB 1
40 RDB 1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

RD 0
ER 0
ST2 0
SD 0
RD 1
ER 1
ST2 1
SD 1
SCKA 0
TDA 0
RDA 0
SCKA 1
TDA 1
RDA 1

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

SG 0
RT 0
RS 0
SG 1
RT 1
RS 1

LT1

LT2

LT3

RD 0
ER 0
ST2 0
SD 0
RD 1
ER 1
ST2 1
SD 1

LT4

LT5

SCKB 0
TDB 0
RDB 0
SCKB 1
TDB 1
RDB 1

LT6

LT7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

SCKA 0
TDA 0
RDA 0
SCKA 1
TDA 1
RDA 1

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

19
18
17
16

1

2

01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

1

HW2

23
22
21
20

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

2

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10HW11

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 459
Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
SG 0
35
36
RT 0
37
RS 0
38
39
SG 1
40
RT 1
41
RS 1
42 SCKB 0
43 TDB 0
44 RDB 0
45
46 SCKB 1
47 TDB 1
48 RDB 1
49
50

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

RD 0
ER 0
ST2 0
SD 0
RD 1
ER 1
ST2 1
SD 1
SCKA 0
TDA 0
RDA 0
SCKA 1
TDA 1
RDA 1

LT4

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

3

PIM

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

3

HW6

HW7

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 460
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

NDA-24296

3

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

• Digital CCIS
MDF
PBX

DTI

OUT

IN

TA

TA

TB

TB

RA

RA

RB

RB

PCM
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

POUTA
POUTB

To PLO

CCH

CCH

CCH

CCH

DTI

TRK
CN2

DCH/
CCH

Note

CCH

FRONT VIEW
DTI

DCH/
CCH

CN2

TRK

DCH/
CCH

DCH/
CCH

TRK

DCH/
CCH

TRK

TRK

Note: A maximum of 7CCH cards
can be connected to a DTI card.
CCH Multiple Connection

Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 461
Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

• Analog CCIS (with MODEM)
15-m (50-foot) cable limit
PBX
MDF
RD

RD

SG

SG

ER

ER

RT

RT

ST2

ST2

RS

RS

SD

SD

MODEM

CCH


• synchronous
• 2400, 4800, 9600 bps
• 4-wire
• Full Duplex

Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS)

CHAPTER 3
Page 462
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

PIM
3
2
1
0

SW01

SW01-2 and 3: Not used
ON

3
2
1
0

SW02

ON
ON

12345678

SW10

SW11

Standard Setting

SW12

Standard Setting

ON

12345678

SW13

ON

12345678

SW14

MB

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 463
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at
1.5 M bit/s. Being equipped with a Common Channel Handler (CCH), which can be allocated to a desired
channel among the existing 24 channels by key setting and programming, this card can be used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system. A built-in resonance circuit can be used
for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain
appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been
already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key setting and programming.

Common Channel Signaling Link
Built-in Common Channel Handler (x1)

INT

TSW

INT

CCH

T

CCIS
NETWORK

R
24CCT
1.544 MHz Clock Extraction
(For PLO-secondary switch)

I/O Local Bus
System Clock
CPU

PLO

: Common Channel Signaling Link
: Speech Path (PCM Signal)
: Clock Signal

Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 464
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) card can be mounted in the following universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

This card is mounted in the following shaded slots.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note

Universal Slots
Note:

Universal Slots

This card cannot be mounted in Slot 05.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 465
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-138. Note that
there are two types of PA-24 CCTA cards which differ in their face layouts.

SW6G
OPE
N-OPE

SW4D SW5D

MB
SW6C

PCM
FRM
BER
RMT
AIS
DOPE
LYR
LB

SW11B
SW39
SW13B

3
2
1
0

MODE
BL23

SW138

SW58

SW25

BL00
CN2
To "TRK" Connector
on CCH/DCH

OPE
N-OPE
SW18

SW17

MB

SW00

PCM
FRM
BER
RMT
AIS
DOPE
LYR
LB

SW01

3
2
1
0

SW02
SW19

BL23

SW13
SW12

SW15

SW14

SW11
BL00
SW10
CN2
To "TRK" Connector
on CCH/DCH

Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT)

CHAPTER 3
Page 466
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in Table 3-9.

Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM

Red

Lights when an input signal is down (PCM LOSS).

FRM

Red

Lights when a frame alignment loss is detected.

BER

Red

Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multi frame and when a CRC error
occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT

Red

Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS

Yellow

Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

D-OPE

Green

Remains lit while Common Channel Handler (CCH) block is active.

LYR

Green

Remains lit while CCIS signal link is set up.

LB

Green

Remains lit while the CCIS signal is being looped back.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses) or
corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM)

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL00
BL23

STATE

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 467
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING
UP

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

SW00/MB

×

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/SW13B

ON

0

0

×

OFF

3

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
1

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Internal
Loopback

—
—
×
—

—
×
—
—

CCH
Loopback

×
—
—
—

×

OFF

SW01/SW13B

SW01/13B

1

ON

×

OFF
ON
3

Note:

×

OFF

2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

2

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

External Payload All Circuit
Loopback Loopback
MBR

—
—
×
—

Payload Loopback

External Loopback
(Line Loopback)

PA-24CCTA
Line Interface

Framer

Speech Path
Control Block

PAD

Switch

TSW Interface

R
NETWORK
T

Internal Loopback

Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

NDA-24296

—
×
—
—

×
—
—
—

For more information on loopback, see below.

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card.

CHAPTER 3
Page 468
Revision 1.0

CCH
Control
MBR

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW02/
MODE

SW10/4D

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
Transmission Guard Timer Setting (sec.)

0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

×

4 (sec.)

1

5 (sec.)

2

6 (sec.)

3

7 (sec.)

4

8 (sec.)

5

9 (sec.)

6

10 (sec.)

7

11 (sec.)

8

12 (sec.)

9

13 (sec.)

A

14 (sec.)

B

15 (sec.)

C

16 (sec.)

D

17 (sec.)

E

18 (sec.)

F

19 (sec.)

ON

Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Negative

OFF

×

ON
OFF

Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Positive
Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Negative

×

Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Positive

ON

RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF

RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

ON

Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled

OFF

Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled

ON

Data Link Control: MOS

OFF

Data Link Control: BOS

ON

Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF

Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

ON

Coding Type: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF

Coding Type: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

ON

Fixed to ON. When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing
is selected for North America specification.

OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 469
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW11/39

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
PAD Control

ON
1
OFF

×

ON

×

SW11/39-1

2
OFF
ON

×

3

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

4
OFF
ON

×

5

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
6
OFF

×

ON

×

7

SW11/39-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
8

SW12/58

ON

SW11/39-4

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Data PAD Value

64 Kbps
56 Kbps
48 Kbps
64 Kbps INV

SW11/39-6

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

T Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

R Signal Control

OFF

OFF

PAD Control

Bothway
Receive only (Send 0dB)
Send only (Receive 0dB)
Fixed to ARTD command

T Signal Control
SW11/39-5

OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Data PAD Control
SW11/39-3

OFF

SW11/39-2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

SW11/39-8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

T Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

Equalizer Setting

1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON

SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

3
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 470
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Other Combinations

Distance (feet)

0 ~ 40 m
40 ~ 80 m
80 ~ 120 m
120 ~ 160 m
160 ~ 200 m
Impossible

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW12/58

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON

MEANING
PAD Pattern Selection

4
OFF

×

ON

×

SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

5
OFF
ON

×

6

Note:

OFF
ON

×

7

PAD Pattern

PAD Pattern 1
PAD Pattern 2
A→µ Loss (Bothway)
A→µ Loss (Receive)
µ→A Loss (Bothway)
µ→A Loss (Receive)
Impossible

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.
SW12/58-7

OFF
ON

ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Other Combinations

SW12/58-8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

×

8

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

MODE

Alarm is not sent out
All “1”
RMT Alarm

OFF
SW13/6C

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

5

ON

6

ON

7

ON

8
SW14/5D

ON

—

Fixed to all ON (Not used)

×

Netfusing : Not used

OFF

Netfusing : Used

ON

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM
Spec.)

1

2

OFF

×

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK
ROM Spec.)

ON

×

LAYER2 Signal Logic: Positive

OFF

LAYER2 Signal Logic: Negative

ON

In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:
Not to be notified

3
OFF
4

×

In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:
To be notified

ON

Zero Suppress: Not to be suppressed

OFF

Zero Suppress: To be suppressed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 471
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH
NAME
SW15/25

SWITCH
NO.
1
2

3

4
SW17/6G

SETTING
ON

STANDARD
SETTING
×

MEANING
Impedance Setting: 100 Ω

OFF

Impedance Setting: 110 Ω

ON

Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Ground

OFF

×

ON
OFF

Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Ground
×

ON
OFF
ON

1

Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Open

Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Open
Idle Code Sending: To be sent out

×

Idle Code Sending: Not to be sent out
Common Channel Signal Transfer Speed Selection
SW17/6G-1 SW17/6G-2 SW17/6G-3

OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

PAD Pattern

64 Kbps
32 Kbps (Forward)
16 Kbps (Forward)
8 Kbps (Forward)
64 Kbps
32 Kbps (Backward)
16 Kbps (Backward)
8 Kbps (Backward)

Signal Channel Designation
Signal
Channel

4
OFF

5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

NDA-24296

SW17/6G
6

4

5

7

8

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

1

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

2
3

OFF
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

4

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

5

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

6
7

OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

8

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

9

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

10
11

OFF
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

12

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

13

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

14
15

OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

16

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

17

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

18
19

OFF
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

ON
ON

20

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

21

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

22
23

OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

0

ON

CHAPTER 3
Page 472
Revision 1.0

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW18/11B

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

Fixed to all ON

ON

Selection of CCH: Built-in CCH

OFF

Selection of CCH: External CCH
(To be used together with PA-2CCHA card)

5

ON

Selection of Common Channel Signal Speed

6
OFF

6

ON

SW18/11B
7
8

Transfer Speed

OFF
ON
ON 56Kbps
ON
OFF
ON As per SW17/6G-1 - 3
ON
ON
OFF 48Kbps
Other Combinations
Impossible

7
OFF
ON
8
OFF
SW19/138

ON

COP Alarm: Inhibited

OFF

COP Alarm: Allowed

ON

Operating Mode Setting

1

2

SW19/138
2
3

OFF

OFF OFF When No.7 CCIS is set
ON
OFF When No.7 CCIS PCR isNote
set
Other
Not used
Combinations

ON
3
OFF
4

ON

Operating Mode

Note:
—

PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)

Fixed to ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 473
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24CCTA
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD
patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done
by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD
command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD DATA
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2
ARTD
SEND

RECIEVE

1

2 [dB]

2 [dB]

2

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

3

6 [dB]

4

8 [dB]

µ→A Loss
(Bothway)

µ→A Loss
(Receive)

SEND

RECIEVE

SEND

RECIEVE

SEND

RECIEVE

SEND

RECIEVE

3 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

3 [dB]

3 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

0 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

0 [dB]

4 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

12 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

12 [dB]

8 [dB]

3 [dB]

9 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

0 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

0 [dB]

8 [dB]

-3 [dB]
Note

Key settings of SW11/39-3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD Patterns)

7

Note:

A→µ Loss
(Receive)

RECIEVE

5

SEND

A→µ Loss
(Bothway)

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

- represents “GAIN” in this table.

CHAPTER 3
Page 474
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
26
E
27
28
RB
29
30 POUTB
31
32
33
TB
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT0

Slot No.

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT4

LT5

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT6

LT7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT8

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

1

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

HW0

2

HW1

3

HW2

2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

1

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

2

HW7

3

HW8

2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

1

3

HW9 HW10HW11

Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-141).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 475
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card is as follows.
MDF
PBX
Installation Cable
24CCT
OUT

IN

TA

TA

TB

TB

RA

RA

RB

RB

CCIS
NETWORK

POUTA
POUTB
PLO

1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1

DIU1A
DIU1B
Note 2

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.
Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 476
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE
PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

SW00/MB

DOWN

REMARKS
Circuit card make busy cancel

3
2
1
0

SW01/13B

ON

SW02
(MODE)

Standard Setting

24-multiframe CCT Standard
ON
ON

12345678

12345678

SW10/4D
12-multiframe CCT Standard
ON

ON

12345678

12345678

SW11/39

ON

12345678

SW12/58

ON

12345678

SW13/6C

• Fixed to all ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 477
Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

PIM

REMARKS
• 24-multiframe CCT Standard
ON

ON

1234

1234

SW14/5D
• 12-multiframe CCT Standard
ON

ON

SW15/25

ON

1234

12345678

SW17/6G

ON

12345678

SW18/11B

ON

1234

SW19/138

CHAPTER 3
Page 478
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

1234

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler
1.

General Function
This circuit card controls D channels of ISDN Line. This circuit card provides 2-circuit D-channel Handler
(DCH).

TSW
ISDN
Terminal

ILC

24DTI

DSU

DCH
Dterm

DLC

LC

PLO

Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 479
Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module

00

01

02

03

04

05

PIM
06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

Note:

•

This circuit card must be mounted in a slot on the left side of the slot in which DTI card is mounted.

•

This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 04 of PIM0.

CHAPTER 3
Page 480
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-143.

SW14
OPE
N-OPE

SW13

MB
DOPE0
DOPE1

SW12
SW10

SW11

SW01

SW02

Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

N-OPE

Red

DOPE0

Green

Lights when the common channel signaling link is set up.

Flash

Flashes when DCH is started up.

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

~

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

DOPE1

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 481
Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy

×

ON
0

OFF

1

×

No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel
No. 1 Circuit make busy request

OFF

×

No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel

2

OFF

×

Not used

3

OFF

×

Not used

ON
0

OFF

Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

×

ON
1
SW02
2

3

CHAPTER 3
Page 482
Revision 1.0

Circuit card make busy cancel
No. 0 Circuit make busy request

ON
SW01

MEANING

OFF

Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.
Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

×

Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

ON

Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF

Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

ON

Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF

Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/
INSERT IN NO. 0 CIRCUIT

1

2

3

4
SW10

SW10-1

SW10-2

SW10-3

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

64 kbps
32 kbps (Forward)
16 kbps (Forward)
8 kbps (Forward)
64 kbps
32 kbps (Backward)
16 kbps (Backward)
8 kbps (Backward)

Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit

OFF

Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit.
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/
INSERT IN NO. 1 CIRCUIT

6

7

SW10-5

SW10-6

SW10-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TRANSFER SPEED

64 kbps
32 kbps (Forward)
16 kbps (Forward)
8 kbps (Forward)
64 kbps
32 kbps (Backward)
16 kbps (Backward)
8 kbps (Backward)

ON

Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.

OFF

Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.

SW11
(MODE0)

1

AT & T Bell

5

AT & T Communication

SW12
(MODE1)

1

AT & T Bell

5

AT & T Communication

Note:

TRANSFER SPEED

ON

5

8

MEANING

When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.
When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 483
Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT
SW13-1/ SW13-2/ SW13-3 SW13-4/ SW13-5/
SW14-1 SW14-2 SW14-3 SW14-4 SW14-5

1

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

2

3
SW13
(for No. 0
Circuit)
SW14
(for No. 1
Circuit)

4

5

6

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

TIME SLOT NO.

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31

ON

D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side

OFF

D Channel Mode Selection; User Side
SETTING OF SPEED MODE

7

8

CHAPTER 3
Page 484
Revision 1.0

SW13-7/SW14-7

SW13-8/SW14-8

SPEED

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
Inhibit

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-144.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

SG 0
RT 0
RS 0
SG 1
RT 1
RS 1
SCKB 0
TDB 0
RDB 0
SCKB 1
TDB 1
RDB 1

Accommodated in 2
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

RD 0
1
2
ER 0
ST2 0
3
4
SD 0
RD 1
5
ER 1
6
ST2 1
7
SD 1
8
9 SCKA 0
10 TDA 0
11 RDA 0
12
13 SCKA 1
14 TDA 1
15 RDA 1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

SG 0
RT 0
RS 0
SG 1
RT 1
RS 1

LT1

LT2

LT3

RD 0
ER 0
ST2 0
SD 0
RD 1
ER 1
ST2 1
SD 1

LT4

LT5

1 SCKA 0
2
TDA 0
3
RDA 0
4
5 SCKA 1
6
TDA 1
7
RDA 1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

SCKB 0
TDB 0
RDB 0
SCKB 1
TDB 1
RDB 1

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1

2

HW0

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

1

HW7

2

1

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 485
Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

SG 0
RT 0
RS 0
SG 1
RT 1
RS 1
SCLB 0
TDB 0
RDB 0
SCLB 1
TDB 1
RDB 1

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RD 0
10
ER 0
11 ST2 0
12
SD 0
13
RD 1
14
ER 1
15 ST2 1
16
SD 1
17 SCKA 0
18 TDA 0
19 RDA 0
20
21 SCKA 1
22 TDA 1
23 RDA 1
24
25
LT3

LT4

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

3

HW0

HW1

3

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

3

HW6

HW7

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 486
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

NDA-24296

3

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

• When modem is not used

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

DTI

DSU

DCH

Front Cable connection
DCH

DTI/CCT

TRK
CN2

Front

Note:

For cross connections between DTI and D-channel common channel signalling line, refer to the explanations of 24DTI circuit card.
Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 487
Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

• When modem is used

MDF
NEAX2400 IPX

DCH

RD
SG
ER
RT
ST2
RS
SD

RD
SG
ER
RT
ST2
RS
SD

MODEM

• Cable length is maximum 15 meters (50 feet).
• The modem to be used is a synchronous modem of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps, and the communication
method is limited to 4-wire full duplex communications.

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 488
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

3
2
1
0

SW01

REMARKS

SW01-2, 3 : Not used
ON

3
2
1
0

SW02

ON

SW10

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

PIM
SW11

1 : AT & T Bell
5 : AT & T Communication

SW12

1 : AT & T Bell
5 : AT & T Communication

SW13

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW14

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

MB

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 489
Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1.

General Function
This circuit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunction with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A to provide
H11 terminal (1.536 Mbps) with D-channel signal. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminal (64 Kbps),
incidentally, cannot be connected to this circuit card.

TSW
PRT

ILC

H11
Terminal/
Terminal
Adapter

ISDN
NETWORK
PRT

PA-24DTR/
PA-24PRTB-A

Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 490
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-ILCG (ILC) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B-ch

D-ch

D-ch

D-ch

B-ch

B-ch

D-ch

D-ch

B-ch

D-ch

B-ch

B-ch

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions for this circuit card are as follows:
1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.
2. Mount this circuit card so that its leads and the leads of any other analog line/trunk circuit card may
not come out to the same LT cable.
3. This circuit card is not used in even-number module group (MG), unit (U)=0 and group (G)=0.
4. When registering this circuit card in the shaded slots, user must assign B-channels to odd-number
group (G) and D-channel to even-number group(G).
5. Do not mount other line/trunk card in just right side of the slot where a PA-ILCG card is mounted.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 491
Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps and Switches
The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 3-147.

SW06
1

2

3 4 5 6

OPE

7 8

N-OPE
MB KEY

BL42
BL41
LYR4
PWR4

PKT
MODE 0
SW01
1

2

3 4

SW04
1

2

3 4 5 6

7 8

SW05
1

2

3 4 5 6

7 8

Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC)

CHAPTER 3
Page 492
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

MODE 1

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference
LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE
N-OPE

Green
Red
Green
Flash (60IPM)
OFF
Green
Flash (60IPM)
OFF
Green
Flash (120IPM)

BL42

BL41

LYR4

OFF
PWR4

Red

PKT

Green
OFF

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
Lights green when B2-channel is being accessed and in operation.
The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.
The corresponding channel is idle.
Lights green when B1-channel is being accessed and in operation.
The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.
The corresponding channel is idle.
Remains lit while Layer 2 of the corresponding channel is active.
Flashes while Layer 1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established.
Layer 1 and/or Layer 2 have not been established.
Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited.
Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.
Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 493
Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW04

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

MB

SW01

SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card make-busy

DOWN

Circuit card make-busy cancel

1

ON

×

Fixed to ON

2

ON

×

Fixed to ON

3

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

4

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

1

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

2

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

3

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

4

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

5

ON

×

Fixed to ON (Wiring Mode)

6

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

7

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

8

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

ON
1
OFF

PAD Value Selection
SW05-1 SW05-2

×

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

ON
2
OFF

×

SW05-3 SW05-4

3
OFF
ON
4
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 494
Revision 1.0

Length of Call Reference Value

OFF

ON

ON

OFF Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate

ON

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

6

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate

Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate

ON

D-channel Packet Service: Available

OFF

D-channel Packet Service: Not available

ON

0 dB
2 dB
5 dB
8 dB

OFF Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate

OFF

8

0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

OFF

5

7

Sending Pad

Length of Call Reference Value Selection

ON
SW05

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Receiving Pad

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

1

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

2

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

3

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

4

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

5

ON

×

Data link mode for Layer 2: Point-to-Point (P-P)
(Fixed to ON) Note

6

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

7

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

8

ON

×

Not used (Fixed to ON)

0

×

Fixed to 0

SW06

MODE 0

MODE 1

1~F

Not used

0~5

Not used

6
7~F

Note:

MEANING

×

Fixed to 6
Not used

The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) used in this table have no relation to the actual wiring configuration.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 495
Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-148.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 6 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB
TB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 3, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RA
TA

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RB
TB

LT1

LT2

LT3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RA
TA

LT4

LT5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

RB
TB

LT6

1

HW0

3

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT7

RA
TA

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

HW1

HW2

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-149).

CHAPTER 3
Page 496
Revision 1.0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 7 Connector

NDA-24296

3

HW7

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW8

HW9 HW10HW11

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

MDF
PBX

ILC

24DTR/
24PRTB-A

RA

TA

RB

TB

Modular
Rosette

TA

RA

MJ-8SR

TB

RB

RA

TA

RB

TB

Modular
Rosette

TA

RA

MJ-8S

TB

RB

ISDN
Terminal

H11 Terminal/
Terminal Adapter

Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 497
Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

ON

SW01

1 2 3 4

ON
12345678

SW04

ON
12345678

SW05

ON

SW06

12345678

MODE 0

MODE 1

CHAPTER 3
Page 498
Revision 1.0

6

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-4ILCH is a line circuit card which accommodates ISDN Terminal via NT1. The main features of
this circuit card are shown below:
•

A maximum of four Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals can be accommodated.

•

This card and NT1 are connected using 2-wire U Interface.

•

Sealing current (Maximum 15mA) can be supplied for keeping cables from rusting.

TSW
PA-4ILCH
NT1
TE

I.430

ANSI T1.601

PLO

Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 499
Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4ILCH (4ILC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module
00

01

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 500
Revision 1.0

02

03

04

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-151.

OPE
NOPE
MB
BL32
BL31
LYR3
BER3
BL22
BL21
LYR2
BER2

SW12

BL12
BL11
LYR1
BER1
BL02
BL01
LYR0
BER0

SW11
MBR
L3
L2
L1
L0

SW20
LPB

L3
L2
L1
L0

SW10

MODE

MONITOR (Not used)
SW21

Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 501
Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indication on this circuit card are shown below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

OPE

Green

Lights when the card is in normal operation.

NOPE

Red

Lights when the card is in make-busy state.

Green
BLn2
n=0~3

Flashing
Off
Green

BLn1
n=0~3

Flashing
Off
Green

LYRn
n=0~3

BERn
n=0~3
Note:

Flashing

MEANING

Lights when B2 channel of line #n is communicating.
Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).
During idle state.
Lights when B1 channel of the line #n is communicating.
Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).
During idle state.
Lights when layer 2 link of the line #n is established.
Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of S Reference Point (60
IPM). Note
Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of U Reference Point (120
IPM). Note

Off

Synchronization is not established on either Layer 1 or Layer 2.

Red

Two or more CRC errors occur per second and the condition lasts for 10 seconds.

Off

One or no CRC error occurs per second.

Establishment of synchronization on U Reference Point may require 30 seconds or more.

CHAPTER 3
Page 502
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Switches on this card have the following meanings.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy

×

ON
0

OFF

MBR

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

LPB

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

3

×

2
SW10

Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 3.
Not used

×

4-F
1

Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 2.
Loop back is set on NT1 for line 3.

0-2
MODE

Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 1.
Loop back is set on NT1 for line 2.

ON
3

Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 0.
Loop back is set on NT1 for line 1.

ON
2

Line 3 make busy request cancel
Loop back is set on NT1 for line 0.

ON
1

Line 2 make busy request cancel
Line 3 make busy request

ON
0

Line 1 make busy request cancel
Line 2 make busy request

ON
3

Line 0 make busy request cancel
Line 1 make busy request

ON
2

Circuit card make busy cancel
Line 0 make busy request

ON
1

MEANING

Fixed
Not used

ON

×

Fixed

ON

×

D-channel Packet Service Available

OFF

D-channel Packet Service Not Available

3

ON

×

Fixed

4

ON

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 503
Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit
SWITCH
NAME

SW11

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

1

ON

×

Fixed

2

ON

×

Fixed

3

ON

×

Fixed

4

ON

×

Fixed

5

ON

×

Fixed

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

ON

×

Fixed

ON
8

OFF

MEANING

Sealing Current is not supplied.

×

Sealing Current is supplied.
PAD Control (TSW Side PAD Value) Note

1~3

SW12

Note:

SW1

SW2

SW3

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

4

ON

×

Fixed

5

ON

×

Fixed

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

ON

×

Fixed

8

ON

×

Fixed

TSW Side PAD Value

Not used
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-5dB
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-3dB
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB
Not used
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=5dB
(Standard Setting)
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=3dB
PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB

PAD control is shown below.

PAD1
Line Side

TSW Side
PAD2

CHAPTER 3
Page 504
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:
Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:
Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:
Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

SW20

OFF

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:
Point-to-Point (P-P)

Note 1
Note 2

ON

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2:
Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2
Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:
Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF

Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:
Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON

On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF

On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON

On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF

On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON

On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF

On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON

On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF

On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

1

2

3

4

1

2

SW21

3

Note 2

4

5

ON

×

Fixed

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

ON

×

Fixed

8

ON

×

Fixed

Note 1: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) and Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) used in this table have no relation to the

actual wiring configuration.
Note 2: This switch must be set according to the specification of the ISDN terminal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 505
Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in
Figure 3-152.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0
B1
B2
B3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

B0
B1
B2
B3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0
A1
A2
A3

LT Connector

LT0

Slot No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

A0
A1
A2
A3

LT4

B0
B1
B2
B3

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

3

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
CHAPTER 3
Page 506
Revision 1.0

A0
A1
A2
A3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NDA-24296

3

1

HW7

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

MDF
PIM

ILC

A
B

A
B

NT1

Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 507
Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

MB

OFF
No.
No.
No.
No.

MBR

3
2
1
0
ON

OFF
No.
No.
No.
No.

LPB

3
2
1
0
ON

MODE

3

PIM
ON

SW10

ON

SW11

ON

SW12

12 34 567 8

123 4 56 78

ON

SW20

ON

SW21

CHAPTER 3
Page 508
Revision 1.0

12 34

1234

1 234 56 78

NDA-24296

REMARKS

UP:
Circuit card make busy
DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1.

General Function
The PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card provides an interface between the system and a maximum of eight
ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminals, allowing the system to use eight ISDN BRIs, which are made
up of two B channels at 64 kbps and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D × 8), on the same bus. In addition,
this card supports D channel packet function. For this feature, however, available channels are seven
channels, ranging from No. 0 to No. 6.

SW
PRT
ILC
(MAX. 8 circuits)
PRT

ISDN
NETWORK

ILC
(MAX. 8 terminals)

Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 509
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8ILCE-A card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note

Note:

The circuit card cannot be mounted in slot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0
(U=0) of even-number Module Group.

CHAPTER 3
Page 510
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on the circuit card is shown in Figure 3-155.

SW02

SW03

SW06

OPE
N-OPE
MB

CH #7

CH #6

CH #5

BL72
LYR7
BL62
LYR6
BL52
LYR5
BL42

CH #4
BL02

CH #3

BL01
CH #2

LYR0
PWR0

CH #1

CH #0

SW00

SW01

SW04 SW05

LYR4
BL32
LYR3
BL22
LYR2
BL12
LYR1
BL02
LYR0

BL71
PWR7
BL61
PWR6
BL51
PWR5
BL41
PWR4
BL31
PWR3
BL21
PWR2
BL11
PWR1
BL01
PWR0

PKT
MODE0
MODE1

Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 511
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on the circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

COLOR
Green

N-OPE

Red
Green

BL n1
(n=0-7)

Flash (60IPM)
OFF
Green

BL n2
(n=0-7)

Flash (60IPM)
OFF
Green

LYR n
(n=0-7)

PWR n
(n=0-7)

Flash (120IPM)

DESCRIPTION
Remains lit while the circuit card is operating.
Remains lit while the circuit card is in make-busy state.
Lights green when B1 channel is being accessed and in operation.
The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.
The corresponding channel is idle.
Lights green when B2 channel is being accessed and in operation.
The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.
The corresponding channel is idle.
Remains lit while Layer2 of the corresponding channel is active.
Note
Flashes while Layer1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is
established.

OFF

Layer1 and/or Layer2 have not been established.

Red

Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding
circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited.

Green

Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.

PKT
OFF
Note:

Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

Depending on the type of the connected ISDN terminal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp may
flash when the terminal is idle and lights green at the time of call set-up.

CHAPTER 3
Page 512
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on the circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING
ON

MB

SW00

SW01

SW02

SW03

OFF
1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

1
2
3
4
SW04
Note
5
6
7
8

MEANING
Make busy of the circuit card.

×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Normal setting

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

ON

Circuit #0: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #0: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #1: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #1: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #2: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #2: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #3: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #3: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #4: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #4: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #5: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #5: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #6: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #6: Short Passive Connection

ON

Circuit #7: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF

Circuit #7: Short Passive Connection

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 513
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Note:

Set the SW04 to determine the 4-wire bus mode referring to the following.
ON
• Point-to-Point mode: In this mode one Terminal Equipment (TE) can be connected at the end of up to a maximum of 600
m of cable as shown below.
Modular Rossete
(with terminating
resistor (100Ω))

ILC

TE

max 600 m
(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])

• Extended Passive Bus mode: This mode is a point-to-multipoint mode, in which up to eight terminals can be connected.
Note that the terminals must be connected within 50 m from the end of the bus cables as shown below.

ILC
Modular Rossete

Modular Rossete
(with terminating
resistor (100Ω))
TE

TE
max 50m

max 400m
(in the case of 0 .5φ [mm])

OFF
• Short Passive Bus mode: This mode is also a point-to-multipoint mode, in which a maximum of eight terminals can be
connected anywhere on the bus. Note that the bus length is limited to 200 m in this case.
ILC
Modular Rossete

Modular Rossete
(with terminating
resistor (100Ω))
TE

TE

Terminals can be connected any location on the bus.
max 200 m
(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])

CHAPTER 3
Page 514
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

SWITCH

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING
ON
1
OFF

PAD Level Adjustment:

×

ON
2

SW05

MEANING

SW1

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

SW2

RECEIVE (dB)

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF

×

3

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF.

4

OFF

×

Fixed to OFF.

5

OFF

×

Not used

6

OFF

×

Not used

SEND (dB)

0
0
0
0

ON

Packet Access via D channel: In Service

OFF

Packet Access via D channel: Out of Service

0
2
5
8

7
8

ON

×

Fixed to ON.

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Multipoint

ON

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Point

OFF

Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Multipoint

1

2

3

4
SW06
Note
5

6

7

8

Note:

Adjust each key according to the specification of each ISDN terminal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 515
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

SWITCH

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING
0

MODE0

×

MEANING
Fixed to 0.

1
Not used
F
0
Not used
5

MODE1

6

×

Fixed to 6.

7
Not used
F

CHAPTER 3
Page 516
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1
RB2
TB2
RB3
TB3
RB4
TB4
RB5
TB5
RB6
TB6
RB7
TB7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1
RA2
TA2
RA3
TA3
RA4
TA4
RA5
TA5
RA6
TA6
RA7
TA7

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1
RA2
TA2
RA3
TA3
RA4
TA4
RA5
TA5
RA6
TA6
RA7
TA7

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1
RB2
TB2
RB3
TB3
RB4
TB4
RB5
TB5
RB6
TB6
RB7
TB7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1

2

HW0

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

1

HW7

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-157)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 517
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1
RB2
TB2
RB3
TB3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1
RA2
TA2
RA3
TA3

LT0

LT Connector
Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA4
TA4
RA5
TA5
RA6
TA6
RA7
TA7

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

3

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

3

HW6

HW7

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 518
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

RB4
TB4
RB5
TB5
RB6
TB6
RB7
TB7

NDA-24296

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

• Point-to-Point
MDF

ILC

RA

TA

RB

TB

TA

RA

TB

RB

Modular
Rossete
with terminating
resistor (100Ω)

TE

• Point-to-Multipoint
MDF

ILC

RA

TA

RB

TB

TA

RA

TB

RB

Modular
Rossete

TE

Modular
Rossete
with terminating
resistor (100Ω)

TE

TA

RA

RA

TB

RB

RB

RA

TA

TA

TA

TA

RB

Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 519
Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT
NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

MB

ON

1234

SW00

ON

1234

SW01

ON

1234

SW02

ON

1234

SW03
PIM
ON

12345678

SW04

ON

12345678

SW05

ON

12345678

SW06

CHAPTER 3
Page 520
Revision 1.0

MODE0

0

MODE1

6

NDA-24296

REMARKS

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-4DATA (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features
related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,
Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in
one of the following three modes.
•

16-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)

•

32-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)

•

60-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set (See the Reference). In addition,
this circuit card can be used as an external music source.

This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is
busy now. Please stay on
the line for a while.

TSW
INCOMING CALL

(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

COT
PUBLIC
NETWORK

DAT

CALLING PARTY

COT
INCOMING CALL

ATI

CALLING PARTY

ATTCON
(Busy)

CPU

GT

Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 521
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4DATA (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3
Page 522
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-159.

WR

SW5 SW7

OPE

(SW12)

N-OPE
MB

(SW11)

BL7 (G)

SW6

BL4 (G)
BL3 (R)

(SW10)

3
2
1
0

BL0 (R)
MBRQ

(SW9)

MRCS

(SW8)

START
JACK

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP

COLOR

STATE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL4

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a
recording source.

BL7

Flash

Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through
No. 3 circuit).

BL0

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state
or has not been assigned in the system.

-

-

OPE

BL3

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 523
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
MB (SW11)
DOWN

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

×

Circuit card make busy cancel
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT

1
SW1 (for No. 0
Circuit)
SW2 (for No. 1
Circuit)

1

2

ON
ON
OFF

2

ON
ON
OFF

3

4

OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
OFF

TIMER (MODE)

16-sec. mode
32-sec. mode
60-sec. mode

Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits
SW3 (for No. 2
Circuit)

32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits
60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit

3

SW4 (for No. 3
Circuit)

Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 - SW4 must be set in

the same way (Two different modes cannot
be mixed assigned.).

4

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

1

SW5

2

SW5-1

SW5-2

OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
OFF

RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

16-sec. Recording/Playback
32-sec. Recording/Playback
60-sec. Recording/Playback

Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as set

by SW1-SW4.
3
Note 4

ON

×

Compression Law: µ-law

OFF

Compression Law: A-law

ON

When using as an external music-on-hold source

OFF

When using as announcement equipment only

4

Note 4: Valid in the case of recording or playback from a telephone set.

CHAPTER 3
Page 524
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

ON

Single playback by No. 0 Circuit Note 5

OFF

Multiple playback by No. 0 Circuit

ON

Single playback by No. 1 Circuit Note 5

OFF

Multiple playback by No. 1 Circuit

ON

Single playback by No. 2 Circuit Note 5

OFF

Multiple playback by No. 2 Circuit

ON

Single playback by No. 3 Circuit Note 5

OFF

Multiple playback by No. 3 Circuit

1

2

3

4
SW6
5

OFF

×

Fixed

6

OFF

×

Fixed

7

OFF

×

Not used

ON
8
OFF

Recording from a telephone set

×

Normal setting

Note 5: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback

(ON).
1

OFF

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

OFF

×

Not used

4

OFF

×

Not used

SW7

Setting for recording start from a tape recorder or for
playback start.

UP
START (SW8)
DOWN

×

Normal setting

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 525
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

MRCS
(SW9) Note 6

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

E

Set to E while the circuit card is using as announcement
equipment only.

0

Designation of No. 0 Circuit.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.

1

Designation of No. 1 Circuit.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.

2

Designation of No. 2 Circuit.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.

3

Designation of No. 3 Circuit.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.

4

Designation of No. 0 and No. 1 Circuit.
The timer is 32-sec. mode.

5

Designation of No. 2 and No. 3 Circuit.
The timer is 32-sec. mode.

6

Designation of All Circuits.
The timer is 60-sec. mode.

F

Recording from a telephone set.
No. 0 Circuit make busy request
No. 0 Circuit is designated during a recording.

ON
0
OFF

×

OFF

×

2

×

3

WR
(SW12)

×

UP
DOWN

No. 2 Circuit make busy request cancel
No. 3 Circuit make busy request
No. 3 Circuit is designated during a recording.

ON
OFF

No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel
No. 2 Circuit make busy request
No. 2 Circuit is designated during a recording.

ON
OFF

No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel
No. 1 Circuit make busy request
No. 1 Circuit is designated during a recording.

ON
1
MBRQ
(SW10)

MEANING

No. 3 Circuit make busy request cancel
Recording from a tape recorder (WRITE mode)

×

Normal setting

Note 6: When this circuit card is using an external music-on-hold source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.

CHAPTER 3
Page 526
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

6.

External Interface
When this circuit card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following leads (FM, E) appear from
the LT connector.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

FM

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E

LT2

LT3

FM

LT4

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT5

LT6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E

LT7

LT8

FM

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

2

3

1

HW3 HW4 HW5

01 03 05 07 09 11

2

HW6

3

1

HW7

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 527
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference]
How to Record a Message
•

Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode)

SWITCH
SW1

SETTING
1234

~

ON

DESCRIPTION

Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 60 sec.

SW4

1234

1234

SW5

SW7

WR

OPE
N-OPE

ON

SW5

1234

Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec.
A-law/µ-law: µ-law
External Music Source/Announcement
Equipment:
Announcement Equipment

MB
BL7

12 3456 78
BL0
SW6

3
2
1
0

MBRQ
MRCS
START

ON12345678

SW6

MRCS

•

6

Single/Repeated Playback:
Repeated Playback

JACK
1234

1234

1234

1234

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

Channel Designation:
60 sec. mode

Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

Front
DAT

Tape Recorder

Jack
Earphone Jack (3.6 φ )

•

Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded.
(To record a message in the 60 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)

•

Turn the WR key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder is connected to the circuit.)

•

Turn the START key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)

CHAPTER 3
Page 528
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

BATTERY
PACK

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

•

Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.
- recording -

•

The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)

•

Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

How to Play Back the Recorded Message
•

•

Playback from a telephone set
•

Set the related switches on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.

•

Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access.”

•

Hear the recorded message.

Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATA (DAT) card
•

Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.

•

Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.

•

Turn the START key upwards.

•

Hear the recorded message.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 529
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

1234

ON

1234

ON

1234

ON

1234

ON

1234

REMARKS

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

ON

12345678

SW6
PIM
ON

1234

SW7

ON

START
(SW8)

MRCS
(SW9)
ON

MBREQ
(SW10)

3
2
1
0

ON

WE
(SW12)
MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 530
Revision 1.0

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features
related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,
Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in
one of the following three modes.
•

64-sec.

mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)

•

128-sec.

mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)

•

240-sec.

mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. (See the Reference).
In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source.
This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is
busy now. Please stay on
the line for a while.

TSW
INCOMING CALL

(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

COT
PUBLIC
NETWORK

DAT

CALLING PARTY

COT
INCOMING CALL

ATI

CALLING PARTY

ATTCON
(Busy)

CPU

GT

Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 531
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

CHAPTER 3
Page 532
Revision 1.0

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-162.

OPE

WR

N-OPE
MB
SW5 SW3
SW6

BL7

SW1
BL0
3
2
1
0

SW7 SW2

MBRQ
MRCS
START
JACK

SW4
JP0

Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP

COLOR

STATE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL4

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source.

BL7

Flash

Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through
No. 3 circuit)

BL0

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state
or has not been assigned in the system.

-

-

OPE

BL3

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 533
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

MB

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
DOWN

MBRQ

Circuit card make busy

×

1-4
MRCS

Circuit card make busy cancel
Make busy request on a channel basis
(Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)

ON
OFF

MEANING

×

Make busy request cancel on a channel basis

0
Setting of Recording Mode

1
SWITCH NO.

2

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

3
4
5
6

Mode

Channel

64-sec. mode

128-sec. mode
240-sec. mode

0
1
2
3
0, 1
2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3

7
-

SW1
SW4

CHAPTER 3
Page 534
Revision 1.0

Each Switch corresponds to each channel
of
DAT: channel
SW1: channel #0
SW2: channel #1
SW3: channel #2
SW4: channel #3

SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT
1

ON
ON
OFF
ON

NDA-24296

2

ON
ON
OFF
ON

3

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

4

ON
OFF
OFF
ON

TIMER (MODE)

64-sec. mode
128-sec. mode
240-sec. mode
Not available

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

1

SW5

MEANING

SW5-1

SW5-2

RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
OFF

64-sec. Recording/Playback
128-sec. Recording/Playback
240-sec. Recording/Playback

Note 1: Setting

of Recording/Playback Timer should
correspond to that of SW1-SW4.

2

ON
3

×

Compression Law: µ-law

OFF

Compression Law: A-law

ON

To be used as external hold tone source

OFF

To be used as announcement equipment

ON

Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 3

OFF

Multiple playback of No. 0 channel Note 2

ON

Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 3

OFF

Multiple playback of No. 1 channel Note 2

ON

Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 3

OFF

Multiple playback of No. 2 channel Note 2

ON

Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 3

OFF

Multiple playback of No.3 channel Note 2

ON

RAM Test data-clear

4

1

2

3

4
SW6
5
OFF

×

RAM Test data-store

6

OFF

×

Not used

7

OFF

×

Not used

8

OFF

×

Not used

Note 2: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~ 6-4 should be set OFF.
Note 3: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 535
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SW7

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1
OFF

Activation of RAM Test

×

ON
2

MEANING

Normal Setting
Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON.

OFF

×

Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON.

3

OFF

×

Not used

4

OFF

×

Not used

WR

UP
DOWN

START

For Recording from the phone jack

×

UP
DOWN

Normal setting
When starting recording from the phone jack or playback.

×

Normal setting

Table 3-13 Jumper Setting
SWITCH

SWITCH
SHAPE

JP0

LEFT

CHAPTER 3
Page 536
Revision 1.0

RIGHT

SETTING

DESCRIPTION

LEFT

Compression Law: µ-law

RIGHT

Compression Law: A-law

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

6.

External Interface
When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E

LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

FM

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E

LT2

LT3

FM

LT4

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT5

LT6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E

LT7

LT8

FM

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

1

2

HW0

3

1

HW1

2

3

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

2

HW6

3

1

HW7

2

3

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 537
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference]
HOW TO RECORD A MESSAGE
•

Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>)

SWITCH
SW1

SETTING
1234

-

ON

DESCRIPTION

Timer Value for Channel 0-3 240 sec.

SW4

ON

SW5

Circuit Card Timer: 240 sec.
A-law/µ-law: µ-law
External Music Source/Announcement
Equipment:
Announcement Equipment

1234

WR
1234

12 3456 78

SW3

BL7

BL0
1234

SW6

N-OPE
MB

SW5
1234

SW6

ON12345678

OPE

1234

Single/Repeated Playback:
Repeated Playback

SW1
1234

3
2
1
0

MBRQ
MRCS

SW7

SW2
START
JACK

1234

MRCS

6

Channel Designation:
240 sec. mode

BATTERY
PACK

SW4

JP0

JP0

A-law/µ-law: µ-law
LEFT

•

Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

Front

Tape Recorder

(DAT)
jack
earphone jack (3.6 φ )

•

Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded.
(To record a message in the 240 sec mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)

•

Turn the WR key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the circuit.)

•

Turn the START key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)

CHAPTER 3
Page 538
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

•

Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.
- recording -

•

The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 - BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)

•

Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

HOW TO PLAY BACK THE RECORDED MESSAGE

Playback from a telephone set
•

Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.

•

Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access”.

•

Hear the recorded message.

Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card
•

Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.

•

Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.

•

Turn the START key upwards.

•

Hear the recorded message.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 539
Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MB

ON

START

ON

WR

3
2
1
0

MBRQ

MRCS

1234

SW1

1234

SW2

1234

SW3

1234

SW4

1234

SW5

12345678

SW6

1234

SW7

JP0
LEFT

CHAPTER 3
Page 540
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

RIGHT

REMARKS

PH-M16
Line Test

PH-M16
Line Test
1.

General Function
This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports to
send howler tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and
send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.

Note:

A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of line available the line test/automatic
trunk test at the same time is only one.

LC

TEL

TSW
M
U
X
LC

TEL

PIM
LPRA

TEST
EQ

LTST

GT

CPU

EXTENDED I/O BUS
EXTENDED I/O BUS

Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 541
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below.

Note:

This circuit card is used for 1-IMG System.

Mounting Module
02

PH-M16

PH-M16

CHAPTER 3
Page 542
Revision 1.0

PH-M16

00 01

03

LPM

04

NDA-24296

PH-M16
Line Test

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-165.

OPE/MB
MB

SW0

CRIN

Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card
Note:

CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 543
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

4.

Lamp Indications
The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
LAMP
NAME

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

Green

This circuit card is operating.

Red

This circuit card is make-busy.

OPE/MB

5.

Switch Settings
The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard
setting, it is indicated with “X” in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

UP

Circuit card make-busy.

DOWN

Circuit card make-busy cancel

MB
1

ON

×

Setting of a condition of DT detection
(440Hz+350Hz)

2

ON

×

Setting of a condition of RBT detection
(440Hz+480Hz)

ON
3
OFF

Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msc.)

×

Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.)

ON

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending
test tone to ODT
(Set soft control or E-wire loop back)

OFF

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending
test tone to ODT
(Set soft control only)

4

SW0

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER

5

SW0
5

6

ON
ON
ON
ON

7

8

CHAPTER 3
Page 544
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

6

OFF
ON
ON
ON

7

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

8

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

TIME

8µ
16µ
32µ
64µ

PH-M16
Line Test

6.

External Interface

MISC Connector Accommodation
Circuit Card Backboard Connector
Connector Name
Slot Number

00 01 02 03 04

(PH-M16)
PH-M16
PH-M16

LPM

LPM Backboard
MISC

Circuit Card Backboard Connector
MISC CONNECTOR
68PH EXMISC CABLE
MISC CONNECTOR
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

TE
BELL0B
BELL1B
TELB
LCB
THOWB
THOWS
SE
ATB
OUTB
TB1
BELL
EXMJ
MJ0B
MN0B
MJ1B
MN1B
INB

1
TM
2 BELL0A
3 BELL1A
TELA
4
LCA
5
6 THOWA
ONHK
7
TCR
8
ATM
9
ATA
10
11 OUTA
TA1
12
13
14 EXMN
MJ0A
15
16 MN0A
MJ1A
17
18 MN1A
INA
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 545
Revision 1.0

PH-M16
Line Test

PBX

LTST

ODT

MDF

TM
TE
OUTA
OUTB
INA
INB
TA1
TB1
E
M
RA
RB
TA
TB
A
B

LC

Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 546
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16
Line Test

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON(MB)

MB
OFF
ON

12345678

SW0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 547
Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk
1.

General Function
This circuit card is bidirectional amplifier circuitry to be used for such a purpose as level guaranteeing in
a public line—tie line connection. The circuit card is provided with four bidirectional amplifier circuits and
controls gains to speech loss which may vary with the kind of line involved in the connection. Also, this
circuit card is provided with the function to disable the AGC when modem signals such as FAX signals
have arrived.

TSW
C.O. Trunk

Public N.W

Fix AMP
ECb
Echo Canceller which suppresses echo
in the hybrid circuit of a C.O. trunk.
Echo Canceller which suppresses echo
ECb:
in the tie-line side.
Automatic Gain Control circuit (amplifies
AGC:
voice signals arriving from the public
network.)
FixAMP: Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies
voice signals arriving from the tie-line
network.)
PAD:
Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies
voice signals arriving from the public
network)

ECa

ECa:

AGC
PAD
PA-4AMPC

Tie Line N.W

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 548
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00

Note:

01

02

03

PIM
04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 549
Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-169.

OPE

SW00
SW11

SW10

MB
BL3
BL0

SW12

MB3
SW01
MB0

SW02

SW03
SW04

Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP)

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BL0

Green

BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.

~

LAMP NAME COLOR

Flash

BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF

BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is in idle state.

BL3

CHAPTER 3
Page 550
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW00

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP

(MB)

DOWN
0

1

2

Circuit card make busy cancel
The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

×

Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

×

ON
OFF

3

×

ON
OFF

SW01

Circuit card make busy

ON
OFF

MEANING

Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

×

ON

Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

OFF

×

Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.

1

OFF

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

OFF

×

Fixed
Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line)
side operate. (When this switch has been set to ON,
set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to right side.)

ON
4
OFF

×

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
(When this switch has been set to OFF, set SW10, SW11,
and SW12 to left side.)

5

OFF

×

Fixed

6

OFF

×

Fixed

7

OFF

8

OFF

SW02

×
×

Fixed
Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 551
Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

When this card works as AGC:
SW03-1

SW03-2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

SW03-3

SW03-4

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

SW03
SW04

SETTING OF FIXED GAIN OF FIX AMP

0 dB (Standard)
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
SETTING OF GAIN OF BY AGC

0dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -15dBm0
are adjusted to -15dBm0] (Standard)
+4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -11dBm0
are adjusted to -11dBm0]
-4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -19dBm0
are adjusted to -19dBm0]

SW04 is set to all ON.
Amplification of
voice from the
public network

0 dB

Amplification
of voice from the
tie-line network

0 dB

4 dB

8 dB

12 dB

CHAPTER 3
Page 552
Revision 1.0

12 dB

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW03

SW03

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

SW04

ON

1

2

3

4

Left (CAS)

Left (CAS)

Left (CAS)

ON

1

2

3

4

SW04

ON

ON

1

1

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

×

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

×

Right (SIG)
SW12

8 dB

ON

Right (SIG)
SW11

4 dB

SW03

Right (SIG)
SW10

When this card does not work as AGC:

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

×

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

PIM

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

Make busy switch of the corresponding
circuit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circuits)
ON : Make busy of each circuit
OFF : Make busy cancel of each circuit

3
2
1
0

SW01

ON

SW02

ON

SW03

SW04

12 3 4 56 7 8

ON

12 3 4

ON

12 3 4

SW04

Left

Right

SW11

Left

Right

SW12

Left

Right

SW00 (MB)

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 553
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-8TLTR(TLT) circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among the
following four types by key setting on a 4-channel basis.
•

Loop Dialing (LD)

•

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

•

2-wire E & M

•

4-wire E & M

In addition, programmable PADs, whose value can be adjusted by key setting, are equipped with a 4-wire
E & M interface. Note that a cable, which is connected to the “ODT” connector on the front edge of this
card, is necessary when circuits #4 through #7 are used as 2-wire/4-wire E & M trunks. A typical example
of channel allocation is illustrated in Figure 3-170.

INT

SW

INT

PA-8TLTR
ODT #0

LC

ODT #3

Terminal
DID #0
LC
DID #3

Terminal

MDF

circuit #0

circuit #3

2W/4W
Carrier
Equipment

PRIVATE
NETWORK

circuit #4

circuit #7

PUBLIC
NETWORK

I/O Local Bus
CPU

Note:

GT

This diagram shows an example when the PA-8TLTR is used as four 2W/4W E&M and four DID trunks.
In this instance, a flat cable connection is not required.
Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 554
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

2.

Mounting Location / Condition
The PA-8TLTR (TLT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 555
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-171.

OPE

MB
BL7

SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

BL0
MB7
MB0

ODT

Note:

Note

This connector is used when “E & M” is selected for circuits #4 through #7.
Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE

COLOR
Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or while DP signals are being
received (flashes to the dial pulses)

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL0
BL7

CHAPTER 3
Page 556
Revision 1.0

STATE

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH
SETTING
NO.

MB
(SW00)
MB0 - 7
(SW01)

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
DOWN

Circuit card make busy

×

ON
0
OFF

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

×

OFF

Make busy cancel of the No. 5 circuit
Make busy of the No. 6 circuit

×

ON
7

Make busy cancel of the No. 4 circuit
Make busy of the No. 5 circuit

ON
6

Make busy cancel of the No. 3 circuit
Make busy of the No. 4 circuit

ON
5

Make busy cancel of the No. 2 circuit
Make busy of the No. 3 circuit

ON
4

Make busy cancel of the No. 1 circuit
Make busy of the No. 2 circuit

ON
3

Make busy cancel of the No. 0 circuit
Make busy of the No. 1 circuit

ON
2

Circuit card make busy cancel
Make busy of the No. 0 circuit

ON
1

MEANING

Make busy cancel of the No. 6 circuit
Make busy of the No. 7 circuit

×

Make busy cancel of the No. 7 circuit

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 557
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING
1

SW0-1

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

2
3
SW0
(SW10)

MEANING

SW0-2

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

4

OFF

×

Not used

5

OFF

×

Fixed

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

OFF

×

Fixed

8

OFF

×

Not used

SW0-3

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

0-3 CIRCUIT
TRUNK KIND

LD/DID
LD/DID
Not used
2W/4W E&M

LD/DID
EMT
Not used
2W/4W E&M

ON

Programmable PAD P0 Value
0.5 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P0 Value 1 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P0 Value 2 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P0 Value 4 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P0 Value 8 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

1

4-7 CIRCUIT
TRUNK KIND

P0 value is determined as
a sum of selected PAD
values of SW1 (elements
1-5). Note that this setting
is valid for 4W E&M
system.
-Example-

2

3

SW1-1: ON
SW1-2: OFF
SW1-3: OFF
SW1-4: ON
SW1-5: ON

4

In this case P0 value is
12.5 dB.

5
SW1
(SW15)

6

OFF

Fixed

PAD VALUE [dB]
SEND

Possible Setting
Range

CHAPTER 3
Page 558
Revision 1.0

7

OFF

Not used

8

OFF

Not used

RECEIVE

P0:

0 - +15.5
0.5 step

P1:

0 - +15.5
0.5 step

P2:

0 - +7.5
0.5 step

P3:

0 - +7.5
0.5 step

NDA-24296

(0.5 dB)
( 0 dB)
( 0 dB)
( 4 dB)
( 8 dB)

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH
SW2
(SW20)

STANDARD
SWITCH
SETTING
SETTING
NO.

MEANING

ON

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0.5 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P1 Value 1 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

P1 value is determined as a
sum of selected PAD values
of SW2 (elements 1-5). Note
that this setting is valid for
4W E&M system.

ON

Programmable PAD P1 Value 2 dB

- Example -

OFF

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P1 Value 4 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P1 Value 8 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

1

2

3

4

5
6

OFF

×

Fixed

7

OFF

×

Fixed

8

OFF

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

SW2-1: ON
SW2-2: OFF
SW2-3: OFF
SW2-4: ON
SW2-5: ON

(0.5 dB)
( 0 dB)
( 0 dB)
( 4 dB)
( 8 dB)

In this case P1 value is 12.5
dB.

CHAPTER 3
Page 559
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH
SW3
(SW25)

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING

MEANING

ON

Programmable PAD P2 Value 0.5 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P2 Value 1 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P2 Value 2 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P2 Value 4 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P3 Value 0.5 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P3 Value 1 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P3 Value 2 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

ON

Programmable PAD P3 Value 4 dB

OFF

Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

P2 Values is total
of PAD Values
Note
(Valid when 4W
E&M system)
(Ex)
SW3-1: OFF
SW3-2: ON
SW3-3: OFF
SW3-4: OFF
in this case P2
value is 1 dB.

P3 Values is total
of PAD Values
Note
(Valid when 4W
E&M system)
(Ex)
SW3-5: OFF
SW3-6: ON
SW3-7: OFF
SW3-8: OFF
in this case P3
value is 1 dB.

8

Note:

For the setting range of Programmable PAD Values, see the “Setting Range of Programmable PAD
Values” shown for SW1.

CHAPTER 3
Page 560
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH
SW4
(SW30
[No.0-3
Circuit]
SW5
(SW40)
[No. 4-7
Circuit]

STANDARD
SWITCH
SETTING
SETTING
NO.

MEANING

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network
(Valid for LD/DID)
SW4/5
1

2

3

4

Terminating
Impedance

Balancing Network
1KΩ
350Ω

1~4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

2.16µ F
0.21µ F
600Ω

(When
Trunk Kind
has been set
as LD/DID)

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

5

OFF

×

Fixed

6

OFF

×

Not used

7

OFF

×

Not used

8

OFF

×

Not used

NDA-24296

(EIA/TIA -464A)
600Ω

CHAPTER 3
Page 561
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH
SW4
(SW30
[No.0-3
Circuit]
SW5
(SW40)
[No. 4-7
Circuit]

SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
NO.
SETTING

MEANING

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network
(Valid for E&M)
SW4/5
1

2

3

4

6

Terminating Impedance

Balancing Network
1KΩ
350Ω

1 ~ 4, 6

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

2.16µ F
0.21µ F

(When
Trunk Kind
has been set
as 2W
E&M)

600Ω

ON

5

OFF

OFF

×

OFF

OFF

600Ω

ON

Not used

ON

Speech Line: 2-wire

OFF

Speech Line: 4-wire

6
7

OFF

×

Fixed

ON

E&M Control
Idle: Ground

Busy: Battery

OFF

E&M Control
Idle: Open

Busy: Ground

8

CHAPTER 3
Page 562
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

(EIA/TIA -464A)

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

Reference : Table of Fixed PADs
PAD VALUE [dB]
ARTD COMMAND

LD/2W E&M
4W E&M

1

PAD DATA

2

SEND

RECEIVE

SEND

RECEIVE

SEND

RECEIVE

0

P0

P1

0

0

0

-6

1
2
3
4

3
6
12
16

3
6
11
11

3
6
6
0

3
6
-6
-6

6
0
0
0

-6
-6
-6
-6

5

P2

P3

0

0

0

-6

7

0

0

0

0

0

-6

PAD VALUE [dB]
APAD COMMAND

LD/2W E&M
4W E&M

1

PAD DATA

2

SEND

RECEIVE

SEND

RECEIVE

SEND

RECEIVE

1
2
3
4

3
6
12
16

3
6
11
11

3
6
6
0

3
6
-6
-6

6
6
0
0

-6
-6
-6
-6

5

P2

P3

0

0

0

-6

15

0

0

0

0

0

-6

1 :When SW2-8 is set to “ON”. (other than the case of 2 )
2 :When SW2-8 is set to “OFF”. (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Australia)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 563
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

6.

External Interface
Accommodation of LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-172.
See also: Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID ∞ 2W E&M)
Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)
2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation
2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation

Mounting Module

LT Connector

PIM
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0 (TB0)
B1 (TB1)
B2 (TB2)
B3 (TB3)
B4 (TB4)
B5 (TB5)
B6 (TB6)
B7 (TB7)
RB0
RB1
RB2
RB3
M0
M1
M2
M3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0

Slot No.

A0 (TA0)
A1 (TA1)
A2 (TA2)
A3 (TA3)
A4 (TA4)
A5 (TA5)
A6 (TA6)
A7 (TA7)
RA0
RA1
RA2
RA3
E0
E1
E2
E3

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

A0 (TA0)
A1 (TA1)
A2 (TA2)
A3 (TA3)
A4 (TA4)
A5 (TA5)
A6 (TA6)
A7 (TA7)
RA0
RA1
RA2
RA3
E0
E1
E2
E3

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

Group No.

PIM

1

HW0

2

1

HW1

2

HW2

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

2

NDA-24296

1

HW7

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
CHAPTER 3
Page 564
Revision 1.0

LT8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

B0 (TB0)
B1 (TB1)
B2 (TB2)
B3 (TB3)
B4 (TB4)
B5 (TB5)
B6 (TB6)
B7 (TB7)
RB0
RB1
RB2
RB3
M0
M1
M2
M3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

2

HW8

1

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

B0 (TB0)
B1 (TB1)
B2 (TB2)
B3 (TB3)
B4 (TB4)
B5 (TB5)
B6 (TB6)
B7 (TB7)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A0 (TA0)
A1 (TA1)
A2 (TA2)
A3 (TA3)
A4 (TA4)
A5 (TA5)
A6 (TA6)
A7 (TA7)

LT0

LT Connector
Slot No.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA0
RA1
RA2
RA3
E0
E1
E2
E3

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

RB0
RB1
RB2
RB3
M0
M1
M2
M3

3

HW0

HW2

23
22
21
20

3

3

HW1

19
18
17
16

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

3

HW6

3

HW7

HW8

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 565
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

• LD/DID
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a LD or DID trunk.
PBX

Installation Cable
LT Connector

PA-8TLTR

MDF
A0

A

B0

B

A7

A

B7

B

NETWORK

• 2W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 2-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, E&M leads
for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX
ODT Connector

Installation Cable
LT Connector

PA-8TLTR

MDF
A0

A

B0

B

E0

E

M0

M

A3

A

B3

B

E3

E

M3

M

A4

A

B4

B

E4

E

M4

M

A7

A

B7

B

E7

E

M7

M

2-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

2-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

2-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

2400 ODT CABLE

Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M)

CHAPTER 3
Page 566
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

2-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

• 4W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 4-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, RA, RB, and
E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX
ODT connector

Installation Cable
LT Connector

PA-8TLTR

A0(TA0)

MDF

TA

B0(TB0)

TB

RA0

RA

RB0

RB

E0

E

M0

M

A4(TA4)

TA

B4(TB4)

TB

RA4

RA

RB4

RB

E4

E

M4

M

A7(TA7)

TA

4-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

4-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

2400 ODT CABLE

B7(TB7)

TB

RA7

RA

RB7

RB

E7

E

M7

M

4-WIRE
CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 567
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

• 2400 ODT CABLE
The "2400 ODT CABLE" has one ODT connector whose lead accommodation is shown below.

ODT Connector
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)

Champ Connector
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

"2400 ODT CABLE"

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

"2400 ODT CABLE"

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)

Champ Connector (Female)

34

LT
3m (10 feet)

To "ODT" connector

Note:

To MDF

Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.

Figure 3-175 “2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation

CHAPTER 3
Page 568
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

• 2400 ODT CABLE-A
The "2400 ODT CABLE-A" has three ODT connectors whose lead accommodation is shown below.
ODT Connectors
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
To ODT Connector

channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

Note:

1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
(NC)

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
(NC)

1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
(NC)

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
(NC)

1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
(NC)

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
(NC)

Champ Connectors
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(DE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(DE)

channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

To MDF

"2400 ODT CABLE-A"

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
RB4
M4
RB5
M5
RB6
M6
RB7
M7
(AS0)
(AS1)
(AS2)
(AS3)
(AS4)
(AS5)
(AS6)
(AS7)
(DE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
RA4
E4
RA5
E5
RA6
E6
RA7
E7
(AL0)
(AL1)
(AL2)
(AL3)
(AL4)
(AL5)
(AL6)
(AL7)
(DE)

channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7

Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
Figure 3-176 “2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 569
Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

PIM

REMARKS

ON

MB
(SW00)
OFF

MB0-7
(SW01)

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

ON

SW0
(SW10)

SW1
(SW15)

SW2
(SW20)

SW3
(SW25)

SW4
(SW30)

SW5
(SW40)

CHAPTER 3
Page 570
Revision 1.0

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

12 34 5 678

ON

NDA-24296

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter
1.

General Function
This circuit card is used to provide an interface between the Attendant Console(s) and the external
recording/paging equipment as shown in the figure below. Occupying every two slots within a PIM, a
single interface adapter can handle a maximum of six ATTCONs and one-or two-circuit recording/paging
equipment to combine. The connection patterns for the devices and service activation via ATTCONs can
vary, depending on key settings on the card (see Section 5, 'Switch Settings' for details).

ATTCON

MDF
MDF

Max.6

Recording Device

RECC/PGADP
or
Paging Device
ATTCON

MDF
MDF

Max.3

Recording Device

or
Paging Device
RECC/PGADP

MDF

Recording Device
or
Paging Device

Max.3

Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 571
Revision 1.0

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below. Note that this circuit card requires a vacancy
of two consecutive slots.

Mounting Module
00

Note:

01

02

03

PIM
04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3
Page 572
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
Face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-178.

ATT5
ATT4
ATT3
ATT2
ATT1
ATT0

SW12 SW13

SW11

VR0

SW10
VR1
SW15
REC/PGA
(To MDF)

SW14

Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP)

4.

Lamp Indications
The table below shows the meaning of lamp indications.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

MEANING

Provided that any of the ATTCONs has a connection to the Recording/Paging
Green
equipment via the card, the lamp(s) corresponding to the citedATTCON number(s)
(Steady-“ON”)
emit(s) steady light.
ATT0 ~ ATT5
Green
(Flash)

Provided that any of the ATTCONs has not established a connection with the
Recording/Paging equipment, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON
number(s) emit(s) flashing light.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 573
Revision 1.0

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

5.

Switch Settings
Switch settings on the card and their detailed meanings are as follows:
SWITCH
NO.

SWITCH NAME

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop
start (constant)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop
start (constant)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop
start (constant)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop
start (constant)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop
start (constant)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop
start (momentary)
Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop
start (constant)
No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
=6:1
Note 1
No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
= 3 : 1 × 2 sets
Note 1
Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal
sending (momentary)
Note 2
Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal
sending (constant)
Note 2

ON
1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
SW10

4
OFF

ON

MEANING

12 3 4 56 7 8

ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

Note 1: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW12 and SW13.
Note 2: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
PATTERN FOR START SIGNAL TRANSMISSION

KEY SETTING
(SW10-8)

KEY SETTING
(SW14, SW15)

Momentary Loop Start/Momentary Ground Start

ON

Up

Constant Loop Start/Constant Ground Start

OFF

Up

Telephone Loop (Handset lifting)

OFF

Down

CHAPTER 3
Page 574
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

SWITCH NAME
SW11

1

Left

2

MEANING

RIGHT

Remote Phone is used.

LEFT

Remote Phone is not used.

UP

No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
=6:1
Note 4

DOWN

No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
= 3 : 1 × 2 sets
Note 4

UP

Patterns for Recording/Paging activation:
by loop start/ground start signal sending
Note 3

DOWN

Patterns for Recording/Paging activation:
via the telephone loop (handset lifting)
Note 3

UP

DOWN

SW14
SW15

1

STANDARD
SETTING

Right

2
1

SETTING

3

SW12
SW13

3

SWITCH
NO.

UP

2
3

DOWN

VR0
Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for
1st circuit of Recording/Paging machine.
(Volume Resistance)
VR1
Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for
2nd circuit of Recording/Paging machine.
(Volume Resistance)

Warning:

When the Remote Phone is not used, be sure to turn the SW11 to the left side. If the switch key is left on
the right side, the machine components may be damaged by over current.

Note 3: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
Note 4: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW10-7.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 575
Revision 1.0

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

6.

External Interface
The location of REC/PGA connector leads and their connection diagram are shown in Figure 3-179.

Location of REC/PGA Connector Leads

CHAMP Connector (J)
REC/PGA
26 B0
27 M0B
28 K0B
29 B1
30 M1B
31 K1B
32 B2
33 M2B
34 K2B
35 B3
36 M3B
37 K3B
38 B4
39 M4B
40 K4B
41 B5
42 M5B
43 K5B
44 ZB
45 L0B
46 L1B
47 T0B
48 T1B
49
50

1 A0
2 M0A
3 K0A
4 A1
5 M1A
6 K1A
7 A2
8 M2A
9 K2A
10 A3
11 M3A
12 K3A
13 A4
14 M4A
15 K4A
16 A5
17 M5A
18 K5A
19 ZA
20 L0A
21 L1A
22 T0A
23 T1A
24 T0C
25 T1C

For ATT #0
For ATT #1
For ATT #2
For ATT #3
For ATT #4
For ATT #5
For Recording/Paging Machine #0

For Recording/Paging Machine #1 Note

Note: These leads are used when the two - circuit system is adopted for the Recording/Paging service features
(No. of ATTCON: Output Equipment = 3 : 1 × 2 circuits).

Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-180)

CHAPTER 3
Page 576
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging activation]

PBX
RECC/
PGADP

Front
connector

MDF

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE
Note 1
Note 2

A0
B0
M0A
M0B
K0A
K0B
L0A
L0B
T0A
T0B

KA
KB
LA
LB
A
B

To ATT

To Recording/
Speech Signal
Paging machine
Leads
Note 3
Telephone Terminal
Side Leads

Note 1: For speech signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.
Note 2: For control signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.
Note 3: There is restriction here in case a Recording machine is used: The Recording machine should be the type
which is fixed between the Central Office and telephone terminals.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 577
Revision 1.0

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ]

PBX
RECC/
PGADP

Front
connector

MDF

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE
Note 1
Note 2

A0
B0
M0A
M0B
K0A
K0B
L0A
L0B
T0A
T0B
T0C

KA
KB
LA
LB
A
B

To ATT

To Recording/
Speech Signal Paging machine
Leads
Loop Start Leads
Ground Start Leads

Note 1: For speech signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.
Note 2: For control signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4)

CHAPTER 3
Page 578
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case 7 or more ATTCONs are connected to a single Recording/Paging machine ]

PBX

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE

RECC/
PGADP
Front
connector
RECC/
PGADP

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE

Note 2

Note 1

MDF

A0
B0
M0A
M0B
K0A
K0B
L0A
L0B
T0A
T0B
T0C
ZA
ZB
L0A
L0B
T0A
T0B
T0C
ZA
ZB
A0
B0
M0A
M0B
K0A
K0B

KA
KB
LA
LB
A
B

To ATT

To Recording/
Paging machine

KA
KB
LA
LB
A
B

To ATT

Note 1: To use a single Recording/Paging machine for 7 or more ATTCONs, the necessary number of PA-M87
card(s) must be reinforced, according the ATT number, on the side of the ICS. If this is the case, provide
relevant multiple connections between the first-card connector leads and the leads due for the reinforced
circuit card(s). Note that the connection should be performed on the MDF and each connector lead name must
be identical in each connection proccess.
(example)

L0A (below)
T0A (below)

L0A (above)
T0A (above)

L0B (below)
T0B (below)

L0B (above)
T0B (above)

Note 2: When performing the multiple connections, the leads here (“ZA” and “ZB”) must be given another multiple
connection in addition to that required in a normal pattern (refer to Note 1).
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 579
Revision 1.0

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ]

PBX
RECC/
PGADP

Front
connector

MDF

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE

A0
B0
M0A
M0B
K0A
K0B
L0A
L0B
T0A
T0B
T0C

A
B
M
E

To TLT
E&M Signal Leads

To Paging
Speech Signal
Machine
Leads
Loop Start Leads Note

Note : When the Paging machine is to be activated by the ground start, connect the T0B lead to the ground.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4)

CHAPTER 3
Page 580
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SW10

SWITCH SHAPE

ON

REMARKS

12 3 4 56 7 8

1

2

3

SW11

Left

3
SW12
SW13

SW14
SW15

Right
UP

2
1

DOWN

3

UP

2
1

DOWN

VR0
(Volume Resistance)

VR1
(Volume Resistance)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 581
Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk
1.

General Function
The PA-24PRTB-A (PRT) circuit card is a digital interface supporting voice and data communications at
1.5 M bit/sec. Being equipped with a Link Access Procedure for a D channel (LAP D) controller based on
the ITU-T I/Q series, this card provides a Primary Rate Access Interface (PRI) with the system. A built-in
resonance circuit extracts clock signals, which are supplied from the network, so that the system may be in
exact synchronization with the network. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is also equipped with
a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily
selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Speech Path (PCM Signal)
D-channel Signaling Link

INT

TSW

INT
24ch
2-wire
T
2-wire
R
24PRT

I/O Local Bus

1.544MHz Clock
Extraction from Network

System Clock
PLO

CPU

Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 582
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

ISDN
NETWORK

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

2.

Mounting Location / Condition
The PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) card can be mounted in the following shaded universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note
Universal Slots

Universal Slots
Note:

3.

This card cannot be mounted in slot 5.
This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-182.
SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

OPE
N-OPE
MB
PCM
BER
AIS
DOPE
PKT
3
2
1
0

FRM
RMT
LYR

LB
MODE
BL23

SW0

BL00
SW1
CN2

Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 583
Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM

Red

Lights when input signal down is detected (PCM LOSS).

FRM

Red

Lights when frame alignment loss is detected.

PER

Red

Lights when a CRC error occur frequently.

RMT

Red

Lights on receiving Remote Alarm Indication (RAI).

AIS

Yellow

Lights on detection of AIS.

DOPE

Green

Remains lit while the D Channel Controller is on.

LYR

Green

Lights when the link of the D channel is set up.

RKT

Green

Lights when the packet of the D channel is in use.

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
(When BL23 is in used as D channel, lamp is always on.)

-

BL00
BL23

CHAPTER 3
Page 584
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

MB

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

UP
DOWN

MODE

LB

Circuit card make busy

×

AT&T (#4/#5 ESS)

7

NT DMS 100/DMS 250

10

Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172)

ON

Internal loop back set

OFF

×

ON
1
OFF

OFF

×

Line loop back cancel
Payload loop back set

×

ON
3

Internal loop back cancel
Line loop back set

ON
2

Payload loop back cancel
D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request

OFF

×

D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request cancel

ON

×

Impedance 100 Ω

1
OFF

Impedance 110 Ω

ON

Send transformer middle point Ground

2
OFF

×

ON
3
4

Circuit card make busy cancel

5

0

SW0

MEANING

Send transformer middle point Open
Receive transformer middle point Ground

OFF

×

Receive transformer middle point Open

ON

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 585
Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH
NAME
SW1

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

1

OFF

×

Standard setting (Digital PAD/ROM selection)

2

ON

×

Fixed

ON
3
OFF

Interface structure: 24B

×

ON
4
OFF

Interface structure: 23B + D
D channel packet service is provided.

×

D channel packet service is not provided.

SW2
1

SETTING OF EQUALIOZER
SW2-1

2

3

DISTANCE

0 ~ 40m
40 ~ 80m
80 ~ 120m
120 ~ 160m
160 ~ 200m
Not allowed

ON

×

24-Multiframe

5

ON

×

Zero Suppress Select B8ZS (24-multiframe)

6

ON

×

Standard setting

7

OFF

×

Standard setting

ON

×

Line fault is notified to the upper CPU.

OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 586
Revision 1.0

SW2-3

4

8
SW3

SW2-2

ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Other combinations

Line fault is not notified to the upper CPU.

1

OFF

×

Fixed

2

OFF

×

Fixed

3

OFF

×

Alarm processing select Fixed to OFF

4

OFF

×

Main Signal All 1 supervision is not made.

5

ON

×

Fixed

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

ON

×

Fixed

8

ON

×

Fixed

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH
NAME
SW4

SWITCH
NO.
1
2
3

4

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

OFF

×

Fixed (D channel)

ON

×

D Channel Mode Selection; Used Side

OFF

D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side

ON

D Channel Signal Logic; Negative

OFF

×

ON

×

SW4-4

SW4-5

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

D Channel Signal Logic; Positive (Standard)

5

ON

×

6

ON

×

Fixed

7

ON

×

Fixed

8

ON

×

Fixed

ON

×

PAD Pattern Selection

SW5
1

OFF
ON
2
OFF

×

ON

×

3

SW5-1

SW5-2

SW5-3

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Note:
OFF
ON

4

×

OFF
ON
5
OFF

×

ON

×

6
OFF
ON
7

×

OFF
ON
8
OFF

D-channel Speed

64 kbps (Standard)
Not used
56 kbps
Not used

PAD Pattern

PAD Pattern 1
PAD Pattern 2
A→µ Loss (Bothway)
A→µ Loss (Receive)
µ→A Loss (Bothway)
µ→A Loss (Receive)

When setting this switch, refer to Digital PAD
Setting Table.

SW5-4

SW5-5

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

SW5-6

SW5-7

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

DIGITAL PAD CONTROL

Both directions
Receive only (Standard)
Send only
ARTD Fixed
DATA PAD CONTROL

64 k (Standard)
56 k AT & T
64 k INV.
48 k PROTIMS

IDLE code is sent out.

×

IDLE code is not sent out.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 587
Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24PRTB-A

This card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already
written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of
the SW 5 (elements 1, 2, 3) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD.
The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD DATA
ARTD
PAD

PAD Pattern 1

PAD Pattern 2

µ→A Loss
(Bothway)

µ→A Loss
(Receive)

A→µ Loss
(Bothway)

A→µ Loss
(Receive)

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
1

2 [dB]

2 [dB]

-3 [dB]
Note

3 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

2

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

3 [dB]

3 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

0 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

4 [dB]

0 [dB]

4 [dB]

3

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

12 [dB]

6 [dB]

6 [dB]

0 [dB]

12 [dB]

4

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

3 [dB]

9 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

0 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

8 [dB]

0 [dB]

8 [dB]

5
7

Note:

PAD value complies with key settings of SW5-6,7. (Irrelevant to PAD patterns)
0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

Through Through

- represents “GAIN” in this table.

CHAPTER 3
Page 588
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Through

Through Through

Through

Through Through

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RB
POUTB
TB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LT Connector

Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT0

Slot No.

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT6

LT7

LT8

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

1

HW0

2

3

HW1

HW2

2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

1

3

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12
01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

2

HW7

3

HW8

2

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

1

3

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-184).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 589
Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24PRTB-A circuit card is as follows.
MDF
PBX

24 PRT
IN
OUT

RA

RA

RB

RB

TA

TA

TB

TB

To DSU
(Digital
Service
Unit)

POUTA
POUTB
PLO

clock extraction

DIU1A
DIU1B

Note

Note:

As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information on
the PLO card, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 590
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

PIM
MODE

3
2
1
0

LB

ON
ON

SW0

ON

SW1

ON

1234

1234

12345678

SW2

ON

12345678

SW3

ON

12345678

SW4

ON

12345678

SW5

MB

DOWN

NDA-24296

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 591
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface
1.

General Function
The PA-24DTR (24DTI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at
1.544 Mbit/s. This card can be also used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling
(CCIS) or an ISDN network when being connected to an additional CCH or DCH circuit card with a flat
cable as illustrated below. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is
equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value
can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Note
CCH/DCH

INT

TSW

Flat Cable

INT
24ch

2
T
2

DIGITAL
NETWORK

R
DTI(PA-24DTR)

I/O Local
Bus

1.544MHz Clock Extraction
(for a PLO-secondary office)

System Clock
PLO

CPU

: Common Channel Signaling Link
: Speech Path (PCM signal)
: Clock Signal

Note:

When PA-24DTR is used in an Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling (ACIS) system, CCH/DCH is not required.

Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System

CHAPTER 3
Page 592
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24DTR (DTI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 593
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-186. Note that
there are two types of PA-24DTR (DTI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

OPE
N-OPE
SW00
PCM
BER
AIS

SW01

FRM
RMT

3
2
1
0

BL23
SW13
SW12
SW11
SW10
BL00
SW15

SW4D

SW14

CN2

SW5D

OPE
N-OPE
MB

SW6C

PCM
BER
AIS

SW13B

SW39

3
2
1
0

BL23
SW58
SW25

BL00
CN2

Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI)

CHAPTER 3
Page 594
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

FRM
RMT

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM

Red

Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).

FRM

Red

Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.

BER

Red

Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error
occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT

Red

Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS

Yellow

Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the
corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM).

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL00
BL23

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 595
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW00
(MB)

UP
¥

Circuit card make busy cancel

ON

0

Internal Loopback : Set

OFF

¥

Internal Loopback : Cancel

ON

1

External Loopback : Set

OFF

¥

External Loopback : Cancel

ON

2

Payload Loopback : Set

OFF

¥

Payload Loopback : Cancel
All Channel Make Busy : Set Note

ON

3

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

DOWN

SW01/13B

Note:

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING

OFF

¥

All Channel Make Busy : Cancel

This switch setting is applicable for a system adopts Associated Channel Interoffice Signalling (ACIS).

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the
SW01/13B.
Payload Loopback

External Loopback
(Line Loopback)

PA-24 DTR (DTI)
Line Interface

Framer

Speech Path
Control Block

PAD

Switch

TDSW Interface

R
Speech Path
T

Internal Loopback

Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

CHAPTER 3
Page 596
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

DIGITAL
NETWORK

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW15/25
1

2

SETTING
ON

STANDARD
SETTING

×

Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]

ON

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

OFF

×

OFF

SW11/39

OFF

×

Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open
Idle Code: To be sent out

×

Not to be sent out
PAD Control

ON
1

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open
Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground

ON
4

Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]

OFF

ON
3

MEANING

OFF

×

ON

×

SW11/39-1

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

2
OFF
ON

×

3

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

4
OFF

5

SW11/39-5

OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

6
OFF

SW11/39-4

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Data PAD Value

64 Kbps
56 Kbps
48 Kbps
64 Kbps INV

SW11/39-6

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

T Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

R Signal Control

ON
7

SW11/39-7

OFF
ON

Bothway
Receive only (Send 0dB)
Send only (Receive 0dB)
Fixed to ARTD command

T Signal Control

ON

ON

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

PAD Control

Data PAD Control
SW11/39-3

OFF

SW11/39-2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

8
OFF

NDA-24296

SW11/39-8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

R Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

CHAPTER 3
Page 597
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW10/4D

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1

OFF

Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

×

ON
2

OFF

4

×

6

Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive
RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF

×

RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

ON

×

Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled

OFF
5

Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive
Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative

ON
3

MEANING

ON

Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled

×

Data Link Control: MOS

OFF

Data Link Control: BOS (For NEAX2400 ICS)

ON

Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF

Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

ON

Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF

Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

ON
OFF

When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for
North America specification.
(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)

ON

Equalizer Setting

7

8
SW12/58
1
OFF

SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3

OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON
2

3

Other Combinations

OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 598
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

Distance

0~133 (ft)/0~40 (m)
133~267 (ft)/40~80 (m)
267~400 (ft)/80~120 (m)
400~533(ft)/120~160 (m)
533~667(feet)/
160~200(m)
Impossible

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW12/58

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING
PAD Pattern Selection

ON

SW12/58-4

4
OFF

×

ON

×

5
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

×

6

Note:

×

7

SW12/58-7

SW12/58-8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

8

SW14/5D

3

4

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

PAD Pattern 1
PAD Pattern 2
A→ µ Loss (Bothway)
A→ µ Loss (Receive)
µ→Α Loss (Bothway)
µ→Α Loss (Receive)
Impossible

Kind of Alarm

Alarm is not sent out
All “1”
RMT

OFF

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 Setting is OFF.)

ON

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM
Spec.)

1

2

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other Combinations

PAD Pattern

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.

OFF
ON

SW12/58-6

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting
Table.

OFF
ON

SW12/58-5

OFF

×

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK
ROM Spec.)

ON

×

LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive Note:

OFF

LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative

ON

Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

OFF

×

Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.

ON

Zero Code Suppression is not provided.

OFF

Zero Code Suppression is provided.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 599
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW13/6C

SETTING
ON

1

STANDARD
SETTING

MEANING

×

OFF
ON
2

×

OFF
ON
3

×

OFF
ON
4

×

Fixed to all ON.

OFF
ON
5

×

OFF
ON
6

×

OFF
ON
7

×

OFF
ON
8
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 600
Revision 1.0

×

Netfusing : Not used
Netfusing : used

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DTI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by
key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - CDN=30(PAD). The PAD patterns and ARTD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD DATA
ARTD
CDN=30

PAD Pattern 1
SEND

RECEIVE

1

2 [dB]

2 [dB]

2
3
4
5
7

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

Note:

PAD Pattern 2
SEND

RECEIVE

A→µ Loss
(Bothway)
SEND

RECEIVE

A→µ Loss
(Receive)
SEND

RECEIVE

µ→A Loss
(Bothway)
SEND

RECEIVE

-3 [dB]
3 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
Note
3 [dB]
3 [dB]
4 [dB]
4 [dB]
0 [dB]
4 [dB]
4 [dB]
4 [dB]
0 [dB]
6 [dB]
6 [dB]
6 [dB]
0 [dB]
12 [dB]
6 [dB]
6 [dB]
3 [dB]
9 [dB]
8 [dB]
8[dB]
0 [dB]
8 [dB]
8 [dB]
8 [dB]
Key settings of SW 11/39 - 3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD patterns).
0 [dB]
0 [dB]
Through Through Through Through Through Through

µ→A Loss
(Receive)
SEND

RECEIVE

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]

4 [dB]
12 [dB]
8 [dB]

Through

Through

- represents “GAIN” in this table.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 601
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

6.

External Interface
The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
26
E
27
28
RB
29
30 POUTB
31
32
33
TB
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
E
36
37
RB
38 POUTB
39
40
41
TB
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT4

LT5

Group No.

PIM

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT6

LT7

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

LT8

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT9 LT10 LT11

2

1

3

1

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

1

3

01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-189).

CHAPTER 3
Page 602
Revision 1.0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

NDA-24296

HW7

3

HW8

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DTI) circuit card is as follows.
PBX
MDF
TA

DTI
OUT
IN

TA

TB

TB

RA

RA

RB

RB

CARRIER
EQUIPMENT

POUTA
POUTB
Note 1
PLO

DIU1A
DIU1B
Note 2

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.
Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 603
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE
PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

SW01/13B
3
2
1
0
ON

SW10/4D

•

4-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

ON

12345678

12345678

•

12-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

SW11/39

•

12345678

24-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

ON

12345678

12345678

•

12-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

SW13/6C

ON

12345678

•

SW12/58

ON

12345678

Note:

12345678

Fixed to all ON.

Equalizer Setting

Note

SW15/25

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14/5D

•

24-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

ON

1 2 3 4

•

12-multiframe DTI Standard
ON

SW00/MB

CHAPTER 3
Page 604
Revision 1.0

1234

DOWN

NDA-24296

1234

Circuit card make busy cancel

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface
1.

General Function
The PA-24DTR (24DLI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital lines and the system at 1.544
Mbit/s. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD
patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings.

Note:

The key settings become valid when SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1.

INT

TSW

INT
24ch
T

TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT

R
DLI(PA-24DTR)

I/O Local
Bus
CPU

: Speech Path (PCM signal)
: Clock Signal

Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 605
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24DTR (DLI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3
Page 606
Revision 1.0

Universal Slots

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-191. Note that
there are two types of PA-24DTR (DLI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

OPE
N-OPE
SW00
PCM
BER
AIS

SW01

FRM
RMT

3
2
1
0

BL23
SW13
SW12
SW11
SW10

BL00
SW15

SW4D

SW14

CN2

SW5D

OPE
N-OPE
MB

SW6C

PCM
BER
AIS

SW01

SW39

FRM
RMT

3
2
1
0

BL23
SW58
SW25

BL00
CN2

Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 607
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

4.

Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE

Green

Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE

Red

Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM

Red

Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).

FRM

Red

Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.

BER

Red

Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error
occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT

Red

Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS

Yellow

Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash

Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the
corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).

OFF

Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

-

BL00
BL23

CHAPTER 3
Page 608
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

5.

Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW00
(MB)

STANDARD
SETTING

SETTING
UP

Circuit card make busy

×

DOWN

SW01/13B

Circuit card make busy cancel

ON

Internal Loopback : Set

0

×

OFF

Internal Loopback : Cancel

ON

External Loopback : Set

1

×

OFF

External Loopback : Cancel

ON

Payload Loopback : Set

2
3

MEANING

OFF

×

Payload Loopback : Cancel

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF)

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
Payload Loopback

External Loopback
(Line Loopback)

PA-24 DTR (DLI)
Line Interface

Framer

Speech Path
Control Block

PAD

Switch

TDSW Interface

R
Speech Path

TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT

T

Internal Loopback

Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 609
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SETTING
ON

1

STANDARD
SETTING

×

MEANING
Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]

OFF

Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]

ON

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

2
OFF
SW15/25

×

ON
3
OFF

Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground

×

ON
4
OFF

Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open
Idle Code: To be sent out

×

ON
1

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open

Not to be sent out
One Digit Dialing: Valid

OFF

×

One Digit Dialing: Invalid

2

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF)

3

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF)

4

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF)
T Signal Control

ON
5

SW11/39-5

SW11/39-6

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF

SW11/39

ON

×

6

T Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

OFF
R Signal Control

ON
7

SW11/39-7

SW11/39-8

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON

×

8
OFF

CHAPTER 3
Page 610
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

R Signal Control

ABCD
ABAB
Bit Steal Inhibited
AAAA

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW10/4D

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1
OFF

Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

×

ON
2
OFF

4

Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive
Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative

×

ON
3

MEANING

Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive
RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF

×

RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

OFF

×

Not used (Fixed to OFF)

ON

×

Data Link Control: MOS

5
OFF

Data Link Control: BOS

ON

Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF

Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

ON

Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF

Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

ON
OFF

When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for
North America specification.
(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)

ON

Equalizer Setting

6

7

8
SW12/58
1
OFF
ON
2
OFF

SW12/58-1
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON

SW12/58-2

SW12/58-3

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Other Combinations

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Distance
0~133 (feet)/0~40 (m)
133~267 (feet)/40~80 (m)
267~400 (feet)/80~120 (m)
400~533 (feet)/120~160 (m)
533~667 (feet)/160~200 (m)
Impossible

3
OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 611
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW12/58

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING
PAD Pattern Selection

ON
4
OFF

×

ON

×

5
OFF
ON

SW12/58-4

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

×

6

Note:

OFF
ON

MEANING

×

7

SW14/5D

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

PAD Pattern

PAD Pattern 1
PAD Pattern 2
A→ µ Loss (Bothway)
A→ µ Loss (Receive)
µ→Α Loss (Bothway)
µ→Α Loss (Receive)
Impossible

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.
SW12/58-7

SW12/58-8

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

×

8

SW12/58-6

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other Combinations

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting
Table.

OFF
ON

SW12/58-5

Kind of Alarm

Alarm is not sent out
All “1”
RMT

OFF

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 standard Setting is
OFF.)

ON

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM
Spec.)

1
OFF

×

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK
ROM Spec.)

ON

×

LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive

2
OFF

LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative

ON

Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

3
OFF

×

Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.

ON

Zero Code Suppression is not provided.

OFF

Zero Code Suppression is provided.

4

CHAPTER 3
Page 612
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH
NO.

SW13/6C

SETTING

STANDARD
SETTING

ON
1

MEANING
Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Valid

OFF

×

Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Invalid

ON

×

Ringer Control: Continuous

2
OFF

Ringer Control: Intermittent

ON

Sending PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

3
OFF

×

ON
4
OFF

×

ON

×

5

SW13/6C-3

SW13/6C-4

SW13/6C-5

PAD Value

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

0 dB
2 dB
4 dB
6 dB
8 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

OFF
Receiving PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

ON
6
OFF

×

ON
7
OFF

×

ON
8
OFF
Note:

×

SW13/6C-6

SW13/6C-7

SW13/6C-8

PAD Value

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

0 dB
2 dB
4 dB
6 dB
8 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

This PAD value table is PAD pattern 1. If other PAD pattern is required, assign PAD pattern by elements
4~6 of SW12/58. The elements become valid when assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1. When ASYD
SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=0, PAD value is “0dB”.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 613
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DLI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by
key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card.
SW13/6C

PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)

SEND-3,4,5
RECEIVE-6,7,8
3

4

5

6

7

8

PAD Pattern 1

PAD Pattern 2

A→µ Loss
(Bothway)

A→µ Loss
(Receive)

µ→A Loss
(Bothway)

µ→A Loss
(Receive)

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

OFF OFF OFF

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

OFF OFF

ON

2 [dB]

2 [dB]

OFF ON OFF
OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

Note:

0 [dB]
-3 [dB]
Note

3 [dB]
0 [dB]
3 [dB]

0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
3 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

0 [dB]

3 [dB]
6 [dB]
9 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]

4 [dB]
12 [dB]
8 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

4 [dB]
6 [dB]
8 [dB]

0 [dB]
0 [dB]
0 [dB]

4 [dB]
12 [dB]
8 [dB]

- represents “GAIN” in this table.

CHAPTER 3
Page 614
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

6.

External Interface
The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Mounting Module

PIM

Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
26
E
27
28
RB
29
30 POUTB
31
32
33
TB
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LT Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
E
36
37
RB
38 POUTB
39
40
41
TB
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT0

Slot No.

LT1

LT2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT3

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT4

LT5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

E
RB
POUTB
TB

LT6

LT7

LT8

E
RA
POUTA
TA

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

1

3

01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 3
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

1

HW0

3

HW1

HW2

2

HW3 HW4 HW5

15
14
13
00 02 04 06 08 10
12

19
18
17
16

23
22
21
20

2

1

3

01 03 05 07 09 11

1

HW6

HW7

3

HW8

2

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-194).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
Page 615
Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DLI) circuit card is as follows.

PBX
MDF
DLI
OUT
IN

TA

TA

TB

TB

RA

RA

RB

RB

Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3
Page 616
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE
PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW00 (MB)

SW01/13B
3
2
1
0
ON

SW10/4D

•

24-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

ON

12345678

12345678

•

12-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

SW11/39

•

12345678

24-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

ON

12345678

12345678

•

12-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

SW13/6C

ON

12345678

SW12/58

ON

12345678

Note:

12345678

Equalizer Setting

Note

SW15/25

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14/5D

•

24-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

ON

1 2 3 4

•

12-multiframe DLI Standard
ON

SW00/MB

1234

DOWN

NDA-24296

1234

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3
Page 617
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3
Page 618
Revision 1.0

NDA-24296
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 644
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:30 08:29:17-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:11:01 08:38:19Z
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:30 08:29:17-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:11:01 08:38:19Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:30 08:29:17-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
Title                           : NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu